TW200306611A - Apparatus with processing stations for manually and automatically processing microelectronic workpieces - Google Patents

Apparatus with processing stations for manually and automatically processing microelectronic workpieces Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW200306611A
TW200306611A TW92103777A TW92103777A TW200306611A TW 200306611 A TW200306611 A TW 200306611A TW 92103777 A TW92103777 A TW 92103777A TW 92103777 A TW92103777 A TW 92103777A TW 200306611 A TW200306611 A TW 200306611A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
processing
bracket
microelectronic workpiece
station
workpiece
Prior art date
Application number
TW92103777A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Randy A Harris
Daniel J Woodruff
Original Assignee
Semitool Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US10/080,914 external-priority patent/US6991710B2/en
Priority claimed from US10/080,910 external-priority patent/US6749391B2/en
Priority claimed from US10/080,915 external-priority patent/US20030159921A1/en
Application filed by Semitool Inc filed Critical Semitool Inc
Publication of TW200306611A publication Critical patent/TW200306611A/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L21/00Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/70Manufacture or treatment of devices consisting of a plurality of solid state components formed in or on a common substrate or of parts thereof; Manufacture of integrated circuit devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/71Manufacture of specific parts of devices defined in group H01L21/70
    • H01L21/768Applying interconnections to be used for carrying current between separate components within a device comprising conductors and dielectrics
    • H01L21/76838Applying interconnections to be used for carrying current between separate components within a device comprising conductors and dielectrics characterised by the formation and the after-treatment of the conductors
    • H01L21/76841Barrier, adhesion or liner layers
    • H01L21/76843Barrier, adhesion or liner layers formed in openings in a dielectric
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C25ELECTROLYTIC OR ELECTROPHORETIC PROCESSES; APPARATUS THEREFOR
    • C25DPROCESSES FOR THE ELECTROLYTIC OR ELECTROPHORETIC PRODUCTION OF COATINGS; ELECTROFORMING; APPARATUS THEREFOR
    • C25D17/00Constructional parts, or assemblies thereof, of cells for electrolytic coating
    • C25D17/001Apparatus specially adapted for electrolytic coating of wafers, e.g. semiconductors or solar cells
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C25ELECTROLYTIC OR ELECTROPHORETIC PROCESSES; APPARATUS THEREFOR
    • C25DPROCESSES FOR THE ELECTROLYTIC OR ELECTROPHORETIC PRODUCTION OF COATINGS; ELECTROFORMING; APPARATUS THEREFOR
    • C25D7/00Electroplating characterised by the article coated
    • C25D7/12Semiconductors
    • C25D7/123Semiconductors first coated with a seed layer or a conductive layer
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L21/00Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/67Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
    • H01L21/677Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere for conveying, e.g. between different workstations
    • H01L21/67763Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere for conveying, e.g. between different workstations the wafers being stored in a carrier, involving loading and unloading
    • H01L21/67766Mechanical parts of transfer devices
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L21/00Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/70Manufacture or treatment of devices consisting of a plurality of solid state components formed in or on a common substrate or of parts thereof; Manufacture of integrated circuit devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/71Manufacture of specific parts of devices defined in group H01L21/70
    • H01L21/768Applying interconnections to be used for carrying current between separate components within a device comprising conductors and dielectrics
    • H01L21/76838Applying interconnections to be used for carrying current between separate components within a device comprising conductors and dielectrics characterised by the formation and the after-treatment of the conductors
    • H01L21/76841Barrier, adhesion or liner layers
    • H01L21/76868Forming or treating discontinuous thin films, e.g. repair, enhancement or reinforcement of discontinuous thin films
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L21/00Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/70Manufacture or treatment of devices consisting of a plurality of solid state components formed in or on a common substrate or of parts thereof; Manufacture of integrated circuit devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/71Manufacture of specific parts of devices defined in group H01L21/70
    • H01L21/768Applying interconnections to be used for carrying current between separate components within a device comprising conductors and dielectrics
    • H01L21/76838Applying interconnections to be used for carrying current between separate components within a device comprising conductors and dielectrics characterised by the formation and the after-treatment of the conductors
    • H01L21/76841Barrier, adhesion or liner layers
    • H01L21/76871Layers specifically deposited to enhance or enable the nucleation of further layers, i.e. seed layers
    • H01L21/76873Layers specifically deposited to enhance or enable the nucleation of further layers, i.e. seed layers for electroplating
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L21/00Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/70Manufacture or treatment of devices consisting of a plurality of solid state components formed in or on a common substrate or of parts thereof; Manufacture of integrated circuit devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/71Manufacture of specific parts of devices defined in group H01L21/70
    • H01L21/768Applying interconnections to be used for carrying current between separate components within a device comprising conductors and dielectrics
    • H01L21/76838Applying interconnections to be used for carrying current between separate components within a device comprising conductors and dielectrics characterised by the formation and the after-treatment of the conductors
    • H01L21/76841Barrier, adhesion or liner layers
    • H01L21/76871Layers specifically deposited to enhance or enable the nucleation of further layers, i.e. seed layers
    • H01L21/76874Layers specifically deposited to enhance or enable the nucleation of further layers, i.e. seed layers for electroless plating
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L2221/00Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof covered by H01L21/00
    • H01L2221/10Applying interconnections to be used for carrying current between separate components within a device
    • H01L2221/1068Formation and after-treatment of conductors
    • H01L2221/1073Barrier, adhesion or liner layers
    • H01L2221/1084Layers specifically deposited to enhance or enable the nucleation of further layers, i.e. seed layers
    • H01L2221/1089Stacks of seed layers

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Electrochemistry (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Metallurgy (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Robotics (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Sustainable Development (AREA)
  • Container, Conveyance, Adherence, Positioning, Of Wafer (AREA)
  • Cleaning Or Drying Semiconductors (AREA)

Abstract

A method and apparatus for manually and automatically processing microelectronic workpieces. The apparatus can include a tool having a plurality of processing stations, all of which are manually accessible to a user and an input/output station configured to support at least one microelectronic workpiece for automatic transfer to and from the processing stations. A transfer device is positioned proximate to the input/output station and the processing stations and is configured to automatically transfer microelectronic workpieces between the input/output station and the processing stations. The apparatus can be used for both manual and automatic processing of microelectronic workpieces, either sequentially or simultaneously. The processing stations can be configured to perform on the microelectronic workpiece functions such as material application , material removal, seed layer enhancement, rinsing, drying, annealing, baking, and metrology.

Description

200306611 玖、發明說明: 相關申請案交互參照 此一申請案主張下面審查中美國專利申請案號中之優 先權並且併合做為參考: (A)10/080,914(perkins Coie 事務所,案件號 29 195·8 1 73US),名稱”用於手動與自動處理微電子工件之 方法及裝置’’; (B)10/080,915(PerkinS Coie 事務所,案件號 29195.8173US1),名稱,,具有用於手動與自動處理微電子工 件之處理站的裝置”;以及 (C)10/080,910(perkins Coie 事務所,案件號 以及在處理微 2002年2月 29195.8173US2),名稱”微電子工件傳送裝置 電子工件中使用該裝置之方法”,以上全部在 22曰申請歸檔。 美國專利申請案號第1〇/_,91〇乃為下述申靖案之 一部份連續申請案:⑴審查中美國專利申請案號第 09/875,300,(Perkins c〇ie 事務所,案件號 29195.8153US),名稱,,用於在—處理機器、之—環境内處理 微電子工件之傳送裝置以及在該微電子卫件之處理中使用 該裝置之方法”,其係在2〇〇2 “月5日申請;以及⑺審 查中美國專利申請案號帛_75,428,(Perkins C〇ie事 矛力所案件號29195.8153US1),名稱,,具有用於處理微電 子工件之傳送裝置之整合工具,,,其係在2001年ό月5曰 申咕以上兩者乃為下述之部份連續申請案··(3)審查中美 200306611 國專射請案號第G8/99G,1()7。名稱”用於微電子工件處 理之自動機器,,,其係在1997年12月15日中請歸楷;⑷ 在1999年8月31日巾請之美國專利中請案號第⑽⑽, 566並在助年1y發證為美國專利號第6,318 ’ 957 ’名稱’’用於微電子工件處理之改良式自動機器,,,其 係在1999年7月9日中請歸檔並指定美國之國際專利申 請案號第PCT/US99/15567之連續案,名稱,,用於微電子 工件處理之自動機器”’且該國際專利中請案係主張來自在 1998年7月11日中請歸檔之美國專利巾請案號第 ,1〇5之優先權,名稱,,用於微電子工件處理之自動機器,, ’(5)在1999年8月31日申請歸檔之美國專利申請案號 第09/386, 590並在2001年11丨27日發證為美國專利號 第6,322,11 9,名稱’’用於微電子工件處理之改良式自動 機器”,其係在1999年7月9日申請歸檔並指定美國之國 際專利申請案號第PCT/US99/15567之連續案,名稱,,用 於微電子工件處理之自動機器”,且該國際專利申請案係主 張來自在1998年7月11曰申請歸檔之美國專利申請案號 第09/1 14 , 105之優先權,名稱,,用於微電子工件處理之自 動機為,以及(6)在2000年7月18日申請歸檔之美國專 利申請案號第09/618,707,其係在1996年7月15曰申 請歸檔之美國專利申請案第08/680,056之分割案且原案 目前已被放棄;以上全部皆在此併入做為參考。此外地, 此一申請案係相關於下面申請案: (a)在2001年6月5日申請歸檔之美國專利申請案號 200306611 第 09/875, 304,名稱,,㈣ ”· 1干之分佈式電源供應 , (b) 在2001年6月5曰由)主蜱# 咕 曰申喷知私之美國專利申請幸鲈 第09/875,365,名避”叮由 寸〜甲口月茶就 石%可適應之電化學處理 (c) 在2001年6月5 a由)主 乃5日申峋知檔之美國專利申 第09/875,424,名瀧,,田认你m各 寻扪甲明案唬 用於使用在工件處理 轉組件及附著該組件之方法”; 心邛陣及奴 (d) 在2001年5月31 a由古主p μ 、200306611 发明 Description of the invention: The related application cross-references this application and claims the priority of the following US patent applications under review and is incorporated by reference: (A) 10 / 080,914 (perkins Coie Office, case number 29 195 · 8 1 73US), the name "method and device for manual and automatic processing of microelectronic workpieces"; (B) 10 / 080,915 (PerkinS Coie Office, case number 29195.8173US1), name, has Device for processing stations for manual and automatic processing of microelectronic workpieces "; and (C) 10 / 080,910 (Perkins Coie Office, case number and processing micro-February 29195.8173US2 February 2002), name" Microelectronic workpieces " The method of using the device in the electronic workpiece of the conveying device ", all of the above apply for filing on the 22nd. US Patent Application No. 10 / _, 91〇 is part of the following applications: ⑴ US Patent Application No. 09 / 875,300 under review, (Perkins Co., Ltd. (Case No. 29195.8153US), name, a conveying device for processing microelectronic workpieces in a processing machine, and the environment, and a method of using the device in the processing of the microelectronic guard ", which is in 2〇 〇2 "Application on May 5th; and" Under review US Patent Application No. _75,428, "(Perkins Co., Inc. Case No. 29195.8153US1), the name, which has been used to handle the transfer of microelectronic workpieces Device integration tool, which was applied on May 5th, 2001. The above two are successive applications for the following parts ... (3) Examination of China-US 200306611 National Shooting Case No. G8 / 99G , 1 () 7. "Name" is an automatic machine for processing microelectronic workpieces, which was reprinted on December 15, 1997; 美国 US Patent Application No. ⑽⑽, 566, which was filed on August 31, 1999 In the first year of the 1st year, the certificate was issued as U.S. Patent No. 6,318 '957' Name ', an improved automatic machine for processing microelectronic workpieces. It was filed on July 9, 1999, and designated the United States international patent Serial No. PCT / US99 / 15567, Title, Automatic Machine for Microelectronic Workpiece Processing "and the claim in this international patent is from a US patent filed on July 11, 1998 Please file No. 105, priority, name, automatic machine for microelectronic workpiece processing, "(5) U.S. Patent Application No. 09/386, filed on August 31, 1999 , 590 and issued a certificate on November 27, 2001 as US Patent No. 6,322,119, entitled "Improved Automatic Machine for Microelectronic Workpiece Processing", which was applied on July 9, 1999 File and designate consecutive US Patent Application No. PCT / US99 / 15567, named ", An automatic machine for microelectronic workpiece processing", and the international patent application claims priority from the US Patent Application No. 09/1 14, 105 filed on July 11, 1998, the name, The automaton for microelectronic workpiece processing is, and (6) US Patent Application No. 09 / 618,707, filed on July 18, 2000, which was filed on July 15, 1996. Partition of US Patent Application No. 08 / 680,056 and the original case is currently abandoned; all of the above are incorporated herein by reference. In addition, this application is related to the following applications: (a) U.S. Patent Application No. 200306611 filed on June 5, 2001 No. 09/875, 304, Name, ㈣ 干 · 1 distribution Power supply, (b) on June 5, 2001 by)) main tick # Gu Yue Shen U.S. Patent Application No. 09 / 875,365, name avoid "Ding You inch ~ Jiakou Yuecha Adaptable Electrochemical Treatment (c) On June 5, 2001 a) The US Patent Application No. 09 / 875,424 filed by the owner and the applicant on the 5th, and the name of each of them Jia Ming's case was used to transfer components and attach the components in the workpiece processing method "; Mind array and slaves (d) On May 31, 2001 a by the ancient master p μ,

申叫細*私之美國專利申請幸 第09/872,151,名貓,,田认他❺2 T月$就 爯用於被電子工件之電化學處 置及方法”;以及 & <表 (e) 在2GG1年5月4日中請歸檔之美國專利巾請案號 第09/849 ’ 505 ’名稱”使用在一用於電化學處理一微電子 工件之一反應器中之可調整電極”。 被段落⑷-⑷所指出之上述全部專利申請案皆在此併 入做為參考。US patent application No. 09 / 872,151, named Cat, which is called “Shenxi”, is used for electrochemical treatment and method of electronic workpieces by 2 T $ ”; and & < Table ( e) U.S. Patent No. 09/849 '505', filed on May 4, 2GG1, "Designation of Adjustable Electrode in a Reactor for Electrochemical Processing of a Microelectronic Workpiece" All the above patent applications indicated by paragraphs ⑷-⑷ are incorporated herein by reference.

發明所屬之技術領域: 本發明一般係關於用於手動及自動處理微電子工件之 方法及裝置。 先前技術 比如半導體元件以及場發射顯示器之微電子工件係一 般地使用數種不同型機器工具”)而被製造於電子工件之 上以及/或之内。許多如此處理機器具有一可在工件上完 成一或是更多程序之單一處理站。一個如此工具之例子是 一從蒙他拿州Kalispell市的Semitool公司購得之單一室 10 200306611 q 〇χ工具。此一工具能具有一在其上可固定一微電子 2件之-容器的架子,以及一用於電化學處理該工件之單 -處理室。一使用者能夠將工件—個接一個載入該室以, 例如,測試或是證明製程配方或其他製程參數。 雖然前述之:^具在玉程環境中財料,但生產程度 之1程則要求比由一單一室工具可提供之更大產量。因此 ,其他處理機器具有複數個能在各別卫件或整批工件上完 成:系列不同程序之處理站。例如,亦可自Semit〇〇i公: 購传之^T21()C及頻譜(Speet_)工具可提供分別地在一整 批以=單-晶圓環境中之自動化處理。這些工具係包括自 動機器’其可自動地自-容器移除該微電子工件,並在相 :處理站之間移動該微電子工件,以及在經處理後返回該 U電子工件至該容器。雖然如此工具對於處理大量微電子 工件係非常有效率,但當它們被使用在一工程,測試 證明環境中時可能不是符合成本效益或實際的。 具有前述工具之-問題是它們基本上要求一在其内操 作之清潔室環境。清潔室在建造以及維修上則是昂貴,並 且因此工具製造商試圖將在被該工具所佔據之清潔室面積 之每平方呎及每小時所能處理微電子工件之數目最大化。 然而,儘管盡最大努力製造小型及有效的工具,但存有連 續壓力以減少該工具之尺寸(例如,該工具^,,足印 (footprint),,)及增加該工具之效率。當元件製造商要求工程 /測試及生產製程之能力時,而這些要求會接著要求甚而 更清潔室’故此一壓力變成更為緊迫。 200306611 現存工具之另一觀點係它們典型地包括可在該工具内 移動該工件之工件傳送機構(比如自動機器)。這些傳送機 構可能無法提供該工件移動之足夠自由度。雖然許多工具 已被研發出具有六個自由度’但是許多這些工具並未被使 用在用於製造微電子工件之處理裝置中,此乃因該另外自 由度增加了系統複雜度之故。因而現存之傳送機構限制了 該自動機器之一或更多運動,比如限制了該自動機器之垂FIELD OF THE INVENTION The present invention relates generally to methods and devices for manually and automatically processing microelectronic workpieces. Prior art microelectronic workpieces such as semiconductor components and field emission displays were typically fabricated on and / or within electronic workpieces using several different types of machine tools.) Many such processing machines have a mechanism that can be performed on the workpiece. A single processing station for one or more programs. An example of such a tool is a single-chamber tool 10 200306611 q 〇χ tool available from Semitool Corporation of Kalispell, Montana. This tool can have a Holds a microelectronic 2-piece-container rack and a single-processing chamber for electrochemical processing of the workpiece. A user can load workpieces one by one into the chamber, for example, for testing or certification processes Formulation or other process parameters. Although the foregoing: has a wealth of materials in the jade process environment, one pass of the production level requires greater output than can be provided by a single-chamber tool. Therefore, other processing machines have multiple capabilities Completed on individual guards or batches of workpieces: a series of processing stations for different procedures. For example, it can also be purchased from Semit 00i: T21 () C and Spectrum (Speet_) Automated processes can be provided separately in a batch-to-single-wafer environment. These tools include automated machines that can automatically remove the microelectronic workpiece from the container and move between phases: processing stations The microelectronic workpiece, and the U electronic workpiece returned to the container after processing. Although such tools are very efficient for processing a large number of microelectronic workpieces, when they are used in a project, testing may not meet the requirements Cost-effective or practical. One of the problems with the aforementioned tools is that they basically require a clean room environment in which to operate. Clean rooms are expensive to construct and maintain, and as a result, tool manufacturers attempt to The square footage of the occupied clean room area and the number of microelectronic workpieces that can be processed per hour are maximized. However, despite the best efforts to make small and effective tools, there is continuous pressure to reduce the size of the tool (for example, The tool, footprint, and) increase the efficiency of the tool. When component manufacturers require engineering / testing and production systems These capabilities will in turn require even cleaner rooms, so this pressure becomes even more urgent. 200306611 Another view of existing tools is that they typically include a workpiece transfer mechanism that can move the workpiece within the tool (such as Automatic machines). These transfer mechanisms may not provide sufficient freedom of movement of the workpiece. Although many tools have been developed with six degrees of freedom ', many of these tools have not been used in processing devices for manufacturing microelectronic workpieces This is because the additional degree of freedom increases the complexity of the system. Therefore, the existing transmission mechanism restricts one or more movements of the automatic machine, such as limiting the verticality of the automatic machine.

直運動。吾人應重視到保有該自動機器之運動自由度之同 時亦減少該工件與該自動機器之複雜度及碰撞之機率將是 必要的。 發明内容: ΛW %』丄忭 < 展罝及方法。 發明之數個實施例之一觀點是一能適用於手動及自動操 二者之單一處理工具。#由組合這些㈣在一單一工具 ,則有限之清潔室面積能被完全地利用到,以完成在該Straight motion. We should pay attention to maintaining the freedom of movement of the automatic machine while reducing the complexity and the probability of collision between the workpiece and the automatic machine. Summary of the Invention: ΛW% 』丄 忭 < Development and method. One of the several embodiments of the invention is a single processing tool that can be applied to both manual and automatic operations. #By combining these ㈣ in a single tool, the limited clean room area can be fully utilized to complete the

件上之非常多種功能。進而言之,藉由將該工且 二或疋全部與一灰室環境相整合,則該工具所佔 間能被減少。因此,振姑 由在-單Γ 據明之數個實施例之工具能 力…面積裝置提供工程及生產程度f程 力而增加昂貴清潔空間之利用度。 “ 少錄t工具係包括被架構成可在該微電子工件上D 夕種功能之站。例如, +上凡成廣; 工件之特性之度量站二一括一用於評估該微電- 如種子層強化材質⑽加材f之材質施加站’ t 、一復盍層。這些材質能被具有一單一 12 200306611 極(陰極或陽極),一多 電極表置,或是一無電極裝置之站There are many functions on the software. Furthermore, by integrating the work and all or two of them into a gray room environment, the tool footprint can be reduced. As a result, Zhen Gu is able to increase the utilization of expensive and clean space by providing engineering and production capabilities to increase the tool capacity of several embodiments according to several examples. "The Shaolu t tool system includes a stand that can be constructed on the microelectronic workpiece to perform various functions. For example, + Shang Fanchengguang; a measurement station of the characteristics of the workpiece is used to evaluate the microelectronics-such as Seed layer reinforced material ⑽ plus material f's material application station't, a composite layer. These materials can be a single 12 200306611 pole (cathode or anode), a multi-electrode surface set, or a station without electrode device

卞以%加。在其他每A 々、由加接λ 果⑪列中,該工具能包括材質移除站, 比如被木構成可引導流 版心 I /麗至5亥k電子工件之嗔灑 站,或是一小型封梦甘 、 ,^ 哀站,其係被架構成引導兩種不同流體 朝向該微電子工件之相钭袁工如 个丨爪媸 千之相對表面。在另外實施例中,該工具 月匕包括一或是更多献步 …、處理站,比如—被架構成可將被施加 在^電子工件之金屬材質退火之退火站。加 Add in%. In each of the other A and λ rows, the tool can include a material removal station, such as a wood spray station that can guide the flow plate core I / Li to 5 Haik electronic workpieces, or a The small Feng Menggan, Ai Ai station is constructed by a frame that guides two different fluids toward the opposite surface of the microelectronic workpiece. In another embodiment, the tool includes one or more steps ..., a processing station, for example, a quilt constitutes an annealing station that can anneal a metal material applied to an electronic workpiece.

、該處理站能藉由—自動機器(用於自動傳送微電子工件 :’或離開4處理站)以及-使用者(用於手動地傳 ^亥从電子工件)而取得。該手動操作能與該自動操作依序 ^ ^ /、此匕括一被放置在鄰近該自動機 裔之濩罩以s 一使用者手動地取得該處理站時,可至少 限制該使用者接達到該自動機器。在本發明之另—觀點中 」-攜帶該微電子工件進人該處理站之支架能被放置在該 濩罩上方,&用於手動操作以及被放置在該護罩下方以用 於自動操作。The processing station can be obtained by-an automatic machine (for automatically transferring microelectronic workpieces: 'or leave 4 processing stations) and-a user (for manually transferring the electronic workpiece from the electronic workpiece). The manual operation can be sequentially performed with the automatic operation ^ ^ /, when the dagger is placed near the hood of the automatic machine to obtain the processing station manually by a user, at least the user can be restricted to access The automatic machine. In another aspect of the present invention-the holder carrying the microelectronic workpiece into the processing station can be placed above the hood, & for manual operation and under the hood for automatic operation .

在-更特別實施例中,一或多個處理站能包括一容器 :以及-可移動地放置於鄰近該容器且被架構成可攜帶該 微電子工件之支架。該支架能移動在介於-第-傳送位置 以及一與該第一傳送位置相隔開之第二傳送位置之間。當 該微電子工件在該第一傳送位置内時,該支架係被置向成 可接收來自-傳送裝置之該微電子工件。當該微電子工件 在該第二傳送位置内時,該支架係被架構成可手動地接收 來自該使用者之該微電子工件。 13 200306611 是傳送裝置係包括一 在一此一實施例之特 手臂上方相隔開一第 該手臂上方相隔開一 二距離,以可將該第 分隔在一不同高度處 手臂之不同間隔可允 ,而而不使工件之間 在另一實施例中,該自動機器或 支撐第一及第二終端控制器之手臂。 別觀點中,該第一終端控制器係在該 一距離,以及該第二終端控制器係在 第二距離。該第一距離係不同於該第 一終端控制器較該第二終端控制器相 。該第一及第二終端控制器之相對於 許該裝置在一疊加關係去攜帶兩工件 發生之碰撞。 【實施方式】 下面的敘述係揭露用於處理微電子工件之裝置之數個 實施例的細節及特點。該名詞,,微電子工件,,係使用在整 個說明書以包括自一基底所形成之一工件,且在基底之上 以及/或之内被製造有微電子電路或是零件。資料儲存元 件或層,以及/或微機械元件。吾人應重視到以下所提出 之數個細節係被提供以一種足夠使熟悉相關本行業者去製 造和使用所揭露之實施例之方式來描述下面的實施例。然 而,對於實施本發明之某些特定實施例,下面所敘述之一 些細節及優點係可能不需要的。此外,本發明能包括那仍 落在本發明之範疇但是未參考圖1 -26而予以詳細描述之其 他實施例。 圖卜8以及以下之相關討論係大致上相關於根據本發 明之數個實施例之適用於手動與自動地處理微電子工件兩 14 200306611 ;。更特别地,圖〗係—個如此裝置之全視圖以及 系解說—裝置,其適用於手動與自動地傳送微電子 二可將該工件置放在該裝置之一處理站處之支架。 圖心5係解說自動工件傳送裝置(比如自動機器),以及圖 係解說用於可移動地從該處理站之上方攜帶該支架之In a more particular embodiment, the one or more processing stations can include a container: and-movably placed adjacent to the container and quilted to form a holder that can carry the microelectronic workpiece. The bracket can be moved between a first transport position and a second transport position spaced from the first transport position. When the microelectronic workpiece is in the first transfer position, the support is oriented to receive the microelectronic workpiece from the transfer device. When the microelectronic workpiece is in the second transfer position, the bracket is configured to receive the microelectronic workpiece from the user manually. 13 200306611 is a transmission device that includes a space above the special arm in this embodiment, and a distance of one or two above the arm, so that the arm can be separated at different heights at different intervals, and Without leaving the workpieces in another embodiment, the automatic machine may support the arms of the first and second terminal controllers. In another aspect, the first terminal controller is at the one distance and the second terminal controller is at the second distance. The first distance is different from that of the first terminal controller compared to the second terminal controller. The collision between the first and second terminal controllers allows the device to carry two workpieces in a superimposed relationship. [Embodiment] The following description discloses details and features of several embodiments of a device for processing microelectronic workpieces. The term, microelectronic workpiece, is used throughout the specification to include a workpiece formed from a substrate, and a microelectronic circuit or part is fabricated on and / or within the substrate. Data storage elements or layers, and / or micromechanical elements. I should note that the details presented below are provided to describe the following embodiments in a manner sufficient to enable those skilled in the relevant industry to make and use the disclosed embodiments. However, for implementing certain embodiments of the present invention, some of the details and advantages described below may not be needed. In addition, the present invention can include other embodiments that still fall within the scope of the present invention but are not described in detail with reference to Figs. 1-26. The related discussion of FIG. 8 and the following are generally related to the application of manual and automatic processing of microelectronic workpieces according to several embodiments of the present invention. More specifically, the diagram is a full view of such a device and is an illustration of the device, which is suitable for manual and automatic transfer of microelectronics. The workpiece can be placed on a stand at one of the processing stations of the device. Figure 5 illustrates an automatic workpiece transfer device (such as an automatic machine), and Figure 5 illustrates a mechanism for removably carrying the stand from above the processing station.

圖以及以下之相關討論係相關於能被包括在該弟 置内之處理站,以及相關於能被該站所完之製程。在一# 表丨生=¾中,微電子工件能被在一度量站(圖9)予以評伯 。材貝能在—電化學沈積站(圖1H4)處被施加至該工件以 及/或被強化,以及/或被整修,或是在一無電極沈積站 圖15:產生比如那些被揭示在目1〇巾之層。該工件能夠在 一小型封裝站(圖16Α·Β)處被斜地蝕刻及清洗,以及/或 在一噴灑站(圖17)處被漂洗,以及在一熱處理站(圖1〇中 退火。在其他實施例中,該裝置能夠完成其他處理以及/ 或其他處理順序。The diagram and the related discussion below relate to processing stations that can be included in the site, and to processes that can be completed by that station. In a # 表 丨 生 = ¾, microelectronic workpieces can be evaluated at a metrology station (Figure 9). The material can be applied to the workpiece at the electrochemical deposition station (Figure 1H4) and / or strengthened and / or refurbished, or at an electrodeless deposition station. Figure 15: Generates such as those disclosed in heading 1 〇 Layer of towel. The workpiece can be etched and cleaned obliquely at a small packaging station (Fig. 16A · B), and / or rinsed at a spraying station (Fig. 17), and annealed in a heat treatment station (Fig. 10). In other embodiments, the device can perform other processing and / or other processing sequences.

圖19-26以及以下之相關討論係相關於用於處理微電 子工件之傳送裝置。更特別地,圖19係一根據本發明之 一實施例之具有一傳送裝置的處理工具之全視圖。圖2〇α_ 24係解說一根據本發明之一實施例之傳送裝置,以及圖 25-26係解說一根據本發明之另一實施例之傳送裝置。 圖1係根據本發明之一實施例之一被架構成可手動與 自動兩者處理微電子工件的裝置1 00之部份地切開等角圖 。在此一實施例之一觀點中,該裝置100能使用在一研究 15 200306611 及研發設定與一生產設定兩者。例如,在一研究及研發設 定中,各別微電子件能夠被手動地移進人及離開該裝置 100以用於使用新方法及處理來實驗及加以驗證。該相同 裝置100能夠被使用在一生產設定,其中大數量的微電子 工件係以-用於處理之常規方式而被自動及有效率地移進 入及離開該裝置。就如在下面之更詳細明,該手動及自動 處理恥使用單一裝置1 〇〇而依序地或同時地發生。The related discussions in Figures 19-26 and below are related to a transfer device for processing microelectronic workpieces. More specifically, Fig. 19 is a general view of a processing tool having a transfer device according to an embodiment of the present invention. Figure 20a-24 illustrates a transmission device according to an embodiment of the present invention, and Figures 25-26 illustrate a transmission device according to another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 is a partially cut isometric view of a device 100 that is constructed by a gantry to handle microelectronic workpieces both manually and automatically according to an embodiment of the present invention. In one aspect of this embodiment, the device 100 can be used in a research 15 200306611 and both a R & D setting and a production setting. For example, in a research and development setting, individual microelectronics can be manually moved into and out of the device 100 for experiments and verification using new methods and processes. The same device 100 can be used in a production setting where a large number of microelectronic workpieces are automatically and efficiently moved into and out of the device in a conventional manner for processing. As explained in more detail below, the manual and automatic processing steps occur sequentially or simultaneously using a single device 100.

該裝置100能包括複數個處理站,且每一處理站係架 構成完成在該微電子工件上之一或更多處理。一些處理站( 比如該電化學沈積,無電極沈積,以及小型封裝)係包括一 被架構成可提供與該卫件相接觸之流體之容器。在處理中 ,一支架係攜帶該工件並與該流體相接觸。該工件能不論 以手動或是以一自傳送裝置而被裝入在該支架之上。 在此一實施例之一觀點中,該裝置100能包括一攜帶 複數個處理站150之底盤101。該底盤101能攜帶八個如The apparatus 100 can include a plurality of processing stations, and each processing station is configured to complete one or more processes on the microelectronic workpiece. Some processing stations (such as the electrochemical deposition, electrodeless deposition, and small packages) include a frame constructed of a container that provides fluid in contact with the guard. In the process, a holder carries the workpiece and comes into contact with the fluid. The workpiece can be loaded on the stand either manually or by a self-conveying device. In one aspect of this embodiment, the apparatus 100 can include a chassis 101 carrying a plurality of processing stations 150. The chassis 101 can carry eight such as

在圖1中所揭示之處理站150,或另一種方式地,在其他 實施中,該底盤101能攜帶其他數目之處理站15〇。該處 理站150能被對準成沿著一站軸151,且該軸在一實施例 :可以大體上為直線。在另_實施例中,該站# i5i能被 f曲(例如,以一馬鞋型)或是具有其他外型。在這些實施 例之任中,彳政電子工件1 14能依照用於在一特定時間點 之特疋處理站150的要件而定而被手動地以及/或自動 地裝進入該處理站1 5 〇。 。亥裝置100能包括一被置放在環繞該底盤ι〇1之全部 16 200306611 或部份以及環繞該處理站150之外殼102。該外殼102能 具有複數個表面,比如一前表面l〇3a,一朝向該前表面 1 Γν 〇 a之相對面之後表面103b,以及兩個介於該前表面 103a與該後表面1〇3b間之側表面1〇3c。該前表面ι〇3&能 被架構成可面對使用者(圖中未示出)並且能包括一被耦合 至處理器1 〇6之圖式使用者介面1 〇7以控制該電單元 之操作。該電單元1〇5接著再提供動力及控制該裝置 1 〇 0之零件。 該前表面103a亦能包括一輸入/輸出站110,其係被 架構成可支撐該微電子工件114以用於自動傳送進入及離 開該處理站150。在此一實施例之一觀點中,該輸入/輸 出站能包括兩個傾斜平台1丨丨,且每一平台係被架構成可 支樓一可移除地攜帶複數個該微電子工件丨丨4之容器} i 3 。該傾斜平台HI能從一向外地傾斜位置(用於接該容器 113)移運至一正朝上的位置(如揭示在圖1中)。當該容器 113係在正朝上的位置時,則在該容器113内之該微電子 工件114係可被一自動傳送裝置13〇穿過在該外殼1〇2中 之容器接取開口 112而取得。 該自動傳送裝置130能包括一被一傳送裝置支架132 所支樓之自動機器13 1。該自動機器13 1能沿著一傳送穿 置引導路徑133移動以從該容器113移除該微電子工件 114並且移動該微電子工件114穿過該容器接取開口 ,而進入該外殼102内並至該處理站150。該自動傳送襄 置130能接著返回該微電子工件114,穿過相同或一不同 17 200306611 之容器接取開口 11 2而至相同或不同之一容器1 1 3。 該前表面103a亦能包括一支架表面115,在其上能被 置放有该谷11 3以用於手動裝入及卸下。在此一實施例 之一觀點中,該支架表面115能具有一可允許接取到該傳 送裝置130之服務之可移除段116。另一種方式地,該傳 送裝置130能被從該裝置1〇〇之其他部份取得。在任一實 施例中’該用者能在該支架表面115上放置該容器丨13並In the processing station 150 disclosed in FIG. 1, or in another way, in other implementations, the chassis 101 can carry other numbers of processing stations 150. The processing station 150 can be aligned along a station axis 151, and the axis can be substantially straight in one embodiment. In another embodiment, the station # i5i can be curved (for example, in the shape of a horse shoe) or have other shapes. In any of these embodiments, the administrative electronic workpiece 1 14 can be manually and / or automatically loaded into the processing station 1 5 according to the requirements for the special processing station 150 at a particular point in time. . . The Hai device 100 can include a whole 16 200306611 or a portion placed around the chassis 010 and a housing 102 surrounding the processing station 150. The housing 102 can have a plurality of surfaces, such as a front surface 103a, a rear surface 103b facing the front surface 1 Γν 〇a, and two between the front surface 103a and the rear surface 103b. Lateral surface 103c. The front surface can be constructed to face a user (not shown) and can include a graphical user interface 107 coupled to the processor 106 to control the electrical unit. operating. The electric unit 105 then supplies power and controls the parts of the device 1000. The front surface 103a can also include an input / output station 110 which is constructed to support the microelectronic workpiece 114 for automatic transfer into and out of the processing station 150. In one aspect of this embodiment, the input / output station can include two inclined platforms 1 and each platform is constructed to form a supportable building to removably carry a plurality of the microelectronic workpieces. Container of 4} i 3. The inclined platform HI can be moved from an outwardly inclined position (for receiving the container 113) to an upwardly facing position (as disclosed in FIG. 1). When the container 113 is in the upward position, the microelectronic workpiece 114 in the container 113 can be passed through the container receiving opening 112 in the housing 102 by an automatic conveying device 13. Get. The automatic transfer device 130 can include an automatic machine 131 supported by a transfer device support 132. The automatic machine 131 can move along a conveying and penetrating guide path 133 to remove the microelectronic workpiece 114 from the container 113 and move the microelectronic workpiece 114 through the container access opening to enter the housing 102 and To the processing station 150. The automatic conveyance mechanism 130 can then return to the microelectronic workpiece 114 and pass through the same or a different container 17 200306611 to access the opening 11 2 to the same or different container 1 1 3. The front surface 103a can also include a bracket surface 115 on which the valley 113 can be placed for manual loading and unloading. In one aspect of this embodiment, the support surface 115 can have a removable section 116 that allows access to the services of the transfer device 130. Alternatively, the transfer device 130 can be obtained from other parts of the device 100. In any embodiment, the user can place the container on the support surface 115, and

且然後各別地自該容器113移除該微電子工件丨14以及移 動它們穿過一手動接取開口 1 〇4而進入該外殼1 〇2内。因And then individually remove the microelectronic workpieces 14 from the container 113 and move them through a manual access opening 104 and into the housing 102. because

此,在此一實施例之一觀點中,該手動接取開口 1〇4能為 足夠大以允許該使用者手動地取得該處理站1 5 〇之任一及 全部工件。在此一實施例之一更進而觀點中,該手動接取 開口 104彳以單-,鄰近的開σ。另—種方式地,該 手動接取開π 1G4能包括複數個較小之相鄰開π,且該開 口係藉由,例如,那仍允許該使用者取得全部該處理站 150之垂直分隔物所隔開。在這些實施例之任何一個中, 該手動接取開口 104能被置放在該裝置1〇〇之一單一侧( 比如該前側)上以使得該使用者能夠自該裝置⑽之一側 而手動地取得全部該處理站15〇。 在此一實施例之另一觀點中,呤 邊手動接取開口 1〇4可 以是永久的。另一種方式地,例如 , J如,在早獨地自動化處理 之延展期間,該裝置100能包括一 月匕被置放在該手動接取 開口 104之上方的面板以完全地句 匕住该處理站1 5 〇以及該 傳送裝置1 30。在此一實施例之— 更進而觀點中,該外殼 18 200306611 月匕疋義出 迷你(minO”清潔室環境。在這些實施例 之任一者中,就如下面之參考圖2的更詳細敘述,一護罩 134能被置放成鄰近該傳送裝置13〇以防止,當使用者手 動地取得該處理站150時所產生之介於該傳送裝置13〇與 該使用間之干擾。 忒外殼102之後表面i〇3b面對該前表面1〇3a之對面 並且泫後表面l〇3b提供接取在該外殼1〇2内之零件之服 務。例如,該處理站150以及相關的電性,機械,及化學 系統被從在該後表面1〇3b中之服務接取開口在圖丨中無 法視出)取得。在此一實施例之一觀點中,接取該裝置 100之服務能僅經由該前表面103a以及該後表面l〇3b來 提仏。因此,在該裝置i00被組裝後,該側表面丨並不 需要具有服務接取面板並且不需要接取服務。此一實施例 之一特點是由於,例如,該裝置100並不要求在沿著該外 殼102之側表面i03c的接取通道,故該裝置1〇〇之有效足 印比起一些傳統工具可被減少。 在另一實施例中,該裝置1〇〇能被置放在一相鄰於一 火至裒i兄121之清潔室環境120中。例如,該灰室環境 121能包括一被一壁122從該清潔室環境12〇隔開之室並 且咸灰至裱境121能定義出一並不需要符合清潔室標準之 大致清潔壤境。該壁122能包括一開口 123,以及該外殼 1〇2之後表面i〇3b能以該前表面1〇3a及該側表面1〇孔凸 出進入該清潔室環境12〇而被置放成鄰近該開口 123。一 拴封124此被置放成圍繞在該開口丨23處之該外殼1 〇2的 19 200306611 周邊,以維持介於該清潔室環境120與該灰室環境121之 間隔此一女排此夠具有數優點。例如,當比起該傳統裝 置時,該裝置100之有效足印能被減少,此乃因在清潔室 裱境120之鄰近該後表面1〇3b並不需要提供有一通道。 當在該裳置1〇0上完成服務時,該裝置1〇〇之大部份内部 零件能從該灰室環境121中穿過在該後表 面103b中之接 取開口而取得。因此,許多服務功能可被提供而並不要求 服務人員進入該清潔室環境i 2〇,而該清潔室環境係需要 在人員進入之前花費“穿上,,清潔室服裝之時間的程序。 在其他的實施例中,該裝置1〇〇能夠具有亦可減少該 裝置100之有效足印之其他定位的裝置。例如,該裝置 1〇〇此以被容納在該灰室環境121内之側表面1〇3c的至少 一部份(及可選擇地,其之全部分)而向後地移動穿過該 開口 123並進入該灰室環境121内。因此,被該裝置1〇〇 所要求之清潔室樓板空間的量可以較少於具有一類似處理 站數目之其他工具。 在該前述實施例之一觀點中,該側表面1〇3c並不需要 接取到以操作或服務該裝置100。所以,該側表面1〇化並 不需要包括被架構成正規接取之接取面板。另一種選擇方 式地,該裝置100能被架構成被放置與另一處理工具係端 對端,並且至少一個該側表面103c能具有一被架構:可2 許該微電子工件114被自動地從該裝置1〇〇傳送至該連接 的處理工具之開口。 圖2係根據本發明之一實施例之參考圖丨之上述的裝 20 200306611 置100之剖面側視圖。在此一實施例之一觀點中,該處理 站150之至少一個能包括一被架構成可提供一處理流體之 谷裔,且該流體係比如為一用於金屬沈積之電解的或無電 解的處理流體。一支架16〇能置放在鄰近該容器152並且 被架構成容納單一微電子工件114並且攜帶該微電子工件 114與忒處理流體相接觸。另一種選擇方式地,該支架 160能被架構成可同時攜帶複數個微電子工件丨14。在尚 有更進而實施例中,該處理站15〇能具有其他的架構並且 能夠實現其他的功能,比如漂洗,烘乾,喷灑,量測,退 火或鍍膜該微電子工件114。用於處理站15〇以及支架 160之其他裝置係被包括在美國專利號第6, 136, 163及 6’ 139,712號,以上兩者在此併入做參考。在一些前述 實施例中,該處理站150並不包括容器,並且因此,該支 架160能與該處理站15〇之其他部份相對應地攜帶該微電 子工件114。 在一實施例中,該支架16〇能包括一具有一被置放成 可容納該微電子工件114之容納表面162(比如一環狀圈) 之頭161。該頭ι61能被一載具164支撐且能相對於該載 具164繞一介於一手動傳送位置(圖2中所揭示)與一處理 位置間之頭旋轉軸166(如箭頭A所指示)旋轉。在該手動 傳送位置中,該容納表面丨62能面朝向上地以允許一使用 者手動地放置微電子工件114在該頭161上,或自該頭 161移除該微電子工件丨丨4。例如,該使用者能操作一具 有真空端控制器之棒1 〇8以置放及除移該微電子工件 21 200306611 114。在其他實施例中’該使用者能藉由手來置放及除移 置放且除移微電子I件114。或該使用者能㈣其他手動 益具。在這些實施例之任一中,該頭161能繞該頭旋轉軸 ⑹旋轉刚度而從該手動傳送位置至該處理站150。, 並且能被降低進入該用於處理該微電子工件114之容器 152 内 。 〇 在此-實施例之更進一觀點中,該支架⑽能包括— 支架座180,其從-位於該處理站15〇之上方的位置支揮 該載具164。在一實施例中,該載具164能相對於該支架 座180移動,其就如在下面之參考圖6之更詳細描述中。 在另一實她例中,該载具164能被從上方固定地支撐住。 在任-實施例中’該载具164能包括一可如箭頭b所指示 之向上地及向下地移動該頭161之升降器165。因此,該 頭161能沿著一引導路徑向上地移動至該手動傳送位置,·^ 然後旋轉及向下地至該處理站。 在一此實施例之另一觀點中,該護罩134能延伸至鄰 近該支架160至當該使用者手動地取得該頭161時可至少 限制介於該使用者與該傳送裝置13〇之接觸。例如,該護 罩Π4包括一向上地延伸至一在該傳送裝置13〇上方之位 置的直立部份135。該護罩134更進而包括一在該傳送裝 置130上方橫向地延伸至該支架16〇之橫向部份ι36。因 此,該護罩134能至少限制使用者之接取至該傳送裝置 13〇,但仍允許該使用者在當該頭161係在該手動傳送位 置時可取得該頭161。在此一實施例之更進一觀點中,該 22 200306611 護罩134能係透明以允許觀察到該傳送裝置13〇。 在操作中,該使用者能放置一鄰近該護罩134之直立 部份135的該支架表面115上。該使用者能接著移該容器 113除從該微電子工件114之一者至該支架16〇。該支架 160向上地移動至該手動傳送位置。在此一實施例之另一 観點中,δ亥支架160之頭i 6丨能向上地移動直到該容納表 面162係在该濩罩丨34之橫向部份} 36。該使用者接著到 達該護罩134之上方以裴入(或卸下)該微電子工件114, 但忒5蔓罩134仍保護使用者免於偶然觸到該傳送裝置 。在此一實施例之一觀點中,如果該傳送裝置13〇當該支 架160係在該手動傳送位置時試圖取得該支架16〇,則該 頭161將與該傳送裝置13〇之移動相干擾,而提供用於該 使用者手動地取得該支架丨6〇之額外保護。 ^在此一實施例之一觀點中,該使用者可交替介於啟用 W置100至手動處理與啟用該裝置l〇〇 i自動處理間。 另一方式’該裝置100可在-更多處理站150中自動處理 -些微電子工# 114,此時該使用者能在目前未被自動理 之微電子工件114所佔據之處理站内同時地手動其他微電 子工件114。在任一實施例中,該使用者能在使用者介面 107輸入合適命令以允許手動操作以及/或啟動及導引自 動操作。在任—實施例中’該相同裝i刚係以-參考圖 3之以下描述的方式自動處理微電子工件114。 …圖3係考圖!及2所述之裝置1〇〇的剖面視圖,其揭 不被放置在-自動傳送位置處之該支_⑽可傳送微電子 23 200306611 工件Π4進入以及/或離開該傳送裝置i3〇。在此一實施 “之観點中’ δ亥自動傳送位置被置放在該手動傳送位置( 圖2)之平面底下及該護罩134之橫向部份136的底下。因 此,該傳送裝f U0能接取該頭161之該容納表面162。 該傳送裝f m係包括—被該傳送裝置支架132所支揮之 底座137以用於移動橫向至圖3之平面。該底座137支樓 一被接至手臂139之電梯138以相對於該緑137而向上 及向下地移動該手f 139。兩終端控制_ 14〇(如被揭示為 一上部終端控制器140a及下部終端控制器14_能拖㈣ 附著至該手臂139以相對於該手冑139旋轉,其如參考圖 4之下面更詳細明。每一終端控制器14〇能攜帶一微電子 工件U4’例如’以-真空夾子或另一可釋放之夹住機構 ,以及能朝向及離開該頭161來移動。 在自動操作間,該支架16〇之升降器165能移動該頭 161至该自動傳送位置以容納來自該傳送裝置丨3 〇之一微 電子工件U4»在經該傳送裝置13〇放置該微電子工件 114在該頭161之該容納表面162之上後,該升降器165 能稍微地提高頭161至提供介於該頭161與該容器152間 之垂直間隙。該頭161能接著繞該頭旋轉軸166(如以上參 考圖2之所述)旋轉180度並且該升降器165能降低該^ 161至該處理站。前述之步驟在經處理至從該頭16ι移除 微電子工件114之後可被倒轉。 參考圖1-3之前述的—特點是該支架16〇能選擇性地 停止用於容納該微電子工件114之二個不同位置:一用 200306611 於手動置放及移除該微電子工件之手動傳送位置,以及一 用於自動置放及移除該微電子工件之自動傳送位置。該用 於手動地及自動地傳送該微電子工件114之不同位置的具 有數優點。例如,當該支架160係在手動傳送位置時,該 使用者能被防護免於接觸到該自動傳送裝置丨,及者嗲 支架160係在自動傳送位置時,該傳送裝置13〇能取 支架160。該不同位置可對使用者提供一可見之提示以指 不$用者何時是合適來手動地取得該支架16〇。例如,在 -實施例中’使用者能視到t該帛161係被放置在該護罩 134之橫向部份136的上方時,該容納表面162係可接取 :用於裝入以及/或卸下。相反地’當該帛i6i係被放置 :該護罩m之橫向特136的下方時,該使用者能視到 ^碩係位在於自動傳送處並且無法手動地容納或放 電子工件114。 無难在實^例中,該支架1 60能向上及向下地介於該手 位詈Γ:置與孩自動傳送位置間移動,並且能介於該傳送 一里站間旋轉。在其他實施例中,該支架160能著 間:無轴移動以及/或以不同方式介於這任何之三個位置 ,白 纟尚有t進而實施例中,該手動傳送位置係盥 用者能藉由二。广實施例之另-觀點中,該使 於k 、旋置,例如,一移動護罩134而被保護免 於偶然與該傳送裝置130相接觸。 隻免 圖4係根據本發明之一傳送裝置13〇之等角圖。在此 、M列之一觀點中’該傳送裝置130包括一被該傳送裝 25 200306611 置支架132(圖3)所支撐之自動機器131以如箭頭c所指示 之線性移動。因此,該自動機器13"“動地移進入:: 入/輸出站11〇(圖D及該處理站15〇之任一者(圖1}相= ' 準。該傳送裝置13〇之底座137可支撐該電梯138 J^於 h ’如箭頭D所指示,向上及向下的運動。該電梯138能支 樓該手臂139以用於,如箭頭E所指示,旋轉的運動。在 一實施例中,該手臂139係具有一從該電梯138移動所沿 之軸延伸的單一離心凸部146,且該凸部146支撐該終端 控制器、140。另一選擇方式地,該手臂139能具有複數個鲁 凸部。該單一離心凸部146係較不像複數個凸部裝置在當 該手臂139旋轉時與周邊零件相干擾。在任一實施例中Y 邊終端控制器140能相對於該手臂139繞草一共同軸單獨 地旋轉,其如箭頭F所示。 在此一實施例之一觀點中,該自動機器丨3丨能以一可 考曲電纜142(比如一帶狀電纜)被耦合至一共同單元141。 該自動機器能線性地如箭頭C所示移動而沒有自該可彎曲 電繞142之限制。在此-實施例之—更進而觀點中,需| 鲁 操作該自動機器13 1之控制及電源電路之重要部份能被放 置在該共同單元141内而不是在該自動機器13ι本身上。 此一裝置之優點係該自動機器131能被做成較小並且能因 此要求較少之移動空間。 圖5係根據本發明之一實施例的自動機器丨3 1之部份 概略剖面視圖。在此一實施例之一觀點中,該上部終端控 制器140a係被支撐在一内部軸144a之上並且該下部終端 26 200306611 控制器140b係被支撐在一被置女 牡被置放成自该内部軸144a向外 通離之外料㈣上。料料144b“—外部轴帶 圖5之平面的向外 夕"軸帶 处祕# 1甲驅動,且該外部軸帶145b Γ者被一外部軸皮帶輪(在圖5未示出)所驅動。該内部 二 144a能被麵合至一内部轴帶145a,其接著被一内部軸 ▼輪143a把予動力。因為該上部終端控制器!術係垂 直地與該下部終端控制H 140b才目隔Therefore, in one aspect of this embodiment, the manual access opening 104 can be large enough to allow the user to manually obtain any and all of the workpieces of the processing station 150. In a further aspect of this embodiment, the manual access opening 104 is formed by a single-, adjacent opening σ. Alternatively, the manual access opening π 1G4 can include a plurality of smaller adjacent openings, and the opening is by, for example, still allowing the user to obtain all of the vertical partitions of the processing station 150 Separated by. In any of these embodiments, the manual access opening 104 can be placed on a single side (such as the front side) of the device 100 to enable the user to manually move from one side of the device To obtain all of the processing stations 15o. In another aspect of this embodiment, the manual access opening 104 may be permanent. Alternatively, for example, J. For example, during the extension of the early single automated process, the device 100 can include a panel placed above the manual access opening 104 to completely hold the process. Station 150 and the transfer device 130. In this embodiment—and further from the viewpoint, the housing 18 200306611 defines a mini (minO ”clean room environment. In any of these embodiments, as described in more detail below with reference to FIG. 2 A shield 134 can be placed adjacent to the conveying device 13 to prevent interference between the conveying device 13 and the use generated when the user manually obtains the processing station 150. 忒 Housing 102 The rear surface 103b faces the front surface 103a and the rear surface 103b provides a service for accessing the parts in the housing 102. For example, the processing station 150 and related electrical, mechanical , And the chemical system is obtained from the service access opening in the rear surface 103b (not shown in the figure). In one aspect of this embodiment, the service for accessing the device 100 can only pass through the The front surface 103a and the rear surface 103b are provided. Therefore, after the device i00 is assembled, the side surface does not need to have a service access panel and does not need access service. One feature of this embodiment Is because, for example, the device 100 and An access channel is required along the side surface i03c of the housing 102, so the effective footprint of the device 100 can be reduced compared to some conventional tools. In another embodiment, the device 100 can be placed Placed in a clean room environment 120 adjacent to a fire room 121. For example, the gray room environment 121 can include a room separated from the clean room environment 120 by a wall 122 and salty ash to frame Environment 121 can define a generally clean soil environment that does not need to meet clean room standards. The wall 122 can include an opening 123, and the rear surface i03b of the housing 102 can be the front surface 103a and the side The surface 10 hole protrudes into the clean room environment 120 and is placed adjacent to the opening 123. A bolt 124 is placed so as to surround the periphery of the enclosure 10 02 19200306611 at the opening 23 To maintain the space between the clean room environment 120 and the gray room environment 121, this women's volleyball team has several advantages. For example, the effective footprint of the device 100 can be reduced when compared to the conventional device. This is because It is not necessary to provide a passage in the clean room frame 120 adjacent to the rear surface 103b. When the service is completed on the clothes 100, most of the internal parts of the device 100 can be obtained from the gray room environment 121 through the access opening in the rear surface 103b. Therefore, Many service functions can be provided without requiring service personnel to enter the clean room environment i2o, and the clean room environment requires a procedure to spend "put on, clean room clothing" before the personnel enter. In other embodiments, the device 100 can have other positioning devices that can also reduce the effective footprint of the device 100. For example, the device 100 is moved rearwardly through the opening 123 with at least a portion (and optionally, the entire portion) of the side surface 103c contained in the gray room environment 121 and Enter the gray room environment 121. Therefore, the amount of floor space in the clean room required by the apparatus 100 can be less than other tools having a similar number of processing stations. In one aspect of the foregoing embodiment, the side surface 103c does not need to be accessed to operate or service the device 100. Therefore, the side surface 10 does not need to include a quilt to form a regular access panel. Alternatively, the device 100 can be framed to be placed end-to-end with another processing tool, and at least one of the side surfaces 103c can have a frame: the microelectronic workpiece 114 may be automatically removed from The device 100 is transferred to the opening of the connected processing tool. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional side view of the above-mentioned device 20 200306611 device 100 according to a reference drawing of an embodiment of the present invention. In one aspect of this embodiment, at least one of the processing stations 150 can include a frame constructed to provide a processing fluid, and the flow system is, for example, an electrolytic or non-electrolytic system for metal deposition. Handle fluids. A holder 160 can be placed adjacent to the container 152 and is constructed to hold a single microelectronic workpiece 114 and carry the microelectronic workpiece 114 in contact with the tritium processing fluid. Alternatively, the bracket 160 can be framed to carry multiple microelectronic workpieces 14 at the same time. In still further embodiments, the processing station 150 can have other architectures and can implement other functions, such as rinsing, drying, spraying, measuring, annealing, or coating the microelectronic workpiece 114. Other devices for the processing station 15 and the stand 160 are included in U.S. Patent Nos. 6,136,163 and 6'139,712, both of which are incorporated herein by reference. In some of the foregoing embodiments, the processing station 150 does not include a container, and therefore, the stand 160 can carry the microelectronic workpiece 114 corresponding to other parts of the processing station 150. In one embodiment, the bracket 160 can include a head 161 having a receiving surface 162 (such as an annular ring) placed to receive the microelectronic workpiece 114. The head 61 can be supported by a carrier 164 and can rotate relative to the carrier 164 around a head rotation axis 166 (as indicated by arrow A) between a manual transfer position (disclosed in FIG. 2) and a processing position. . In the manual transfer position, the receiving surface 62 can face upward to allow a user to manually place or remove the microelectronic workpiece 114 on the head 161 or 4 from the head 161. For example, the user can operate a rod 108 with a vacuum end controller to place and remove the microelectronic workpiece 21 200306611 114. In other embodiments, the user can place and remove the microelectronic I-piece 114 by hand. Or the user can use other manual tools. In any of these embodiments, the head 161 is capable of rotating stiffness around the head rotation axis ⑹ from the manual transfer position to the processing station 150. And can be lowered into the container 152 for processing the microelectronic workpiece 114. 〇 In a further aspect of this embodiment, the cradle can include-a cradle base 180 that supports the carrier 164 from a position above the processing station 15o. In one embodiment, the carrier 164 can move relative to the bracket base 180, as described in more detail below with reference to FIG. 6. In another example, the carrier 164 can be fixedly supported from above. In any embodiment, the carrier 164 can include a lifter 165 that can move the head 161 up and down as indicated by arrow b. Therefore, the head 161 can be moved up to the manual transfer position along a guide path, and then rotated and down to the processing station. In another aspect of this embodiment, the shield 134 can be extended to be adjacent to the bracket 160 to at least limit the contact between the user and the transfer device 13 when the user manually obtains the head 161. . For example, the shield Π4 includes an upright portion 135 extending upward to a position above the conveying device 130. The shield 134 further includes a lateral portion ι36 extending laterally above the transport device 130 to the bracket 160. Therefore, the shield 134 can at least restrict the user's access to the transfer device 130, but still allow the user to obtain the head 161 when the head 161 is in the manual transfer position. In a further aspect of this embodiment, the 22 200306611 shield 134 can be transparent to allow the conveying device 13 to be viewed. In operation, the user can place on the support surface 115 of an upright portion 135 of the shield 134. The user can then move the container 113 except for one of the microelectronic workpieces 114 to the holder 160. The bracket 160 moves upward to the manual transfer position. In another embodiment of this embodiment, the head i 6 of the δ-height support 160 can be moved upward until the receiving surface 162 is attached to the lateral portion of the cover 34; 36. The user then reaches (or removes) the microelectronic workpiece 114 above the shield 134 to protect the user from accidental contact with the transfer device. In one aspect of this embodiment, if the transfer device 13 tries to obtain the bracket 16 when the bracket 160 is in the manual transfer position, the head 161 will interfere with the movement of the transfer device 13. Additional protection is provided for the user to manually obtain the stand. ^ In one aspect of this embodiment, the user may alternate between enabling W to set 100 to manual processing and enabling the device 100i automatic processing. Another way 'The device 100 can automatically process some microelectronics # 114 in-more processing stations 150. At this time, the user can manually manually in the processing stations currently occupied by the microelectronic workpieces 114 that are not automatically processed. Other microelectronic workpieces 114. In either embodiment, the user can enter appropriate commands in the user interface 107 to allow manual operation and / or to initiate and guide automatic operations. In any of the embodiments, the same device just automatically processes the microelectronic workpiece 114 in the manner described below with reference to FIG. 3. … Figure 3 is a test plan! The cross-sectional view of the device 100 described in FIG. 2 is not to be placed at the automatic transfer position. The branch can transfer microelectronics 23 200306611 The workpiece 4 enters and / or leaves the transfer device i30. In this implementation, the "δH" automatic transfer position is placed under the plane of the manual transfer position (Figure 2) and under the lateral portion 136 of the shield 134. Therefore, the transfer device f U0 The receiving surface 162 of the head 161 can be accessed. The transmission device fm includes a base 137 supported by the transmission device bracket 132 for moving laterally to the plane of FIG. 3. As soon as the base 137 is connected to the building, The elevator 138 of the arm 139 moves the hand f 139 up and down relative to the green 137. The two terminal controls _ 14〇 (if disclosed as an upper terminal controller 140a and a lower terminal controller 14_ can be attached Up to the arm 139 is rotated relative to the handle 139, which is described in more detail below with reference to Figure 4. Each terminal controller 14 can carry a microelectronic workpiece U4 ', such as a' -vacuum clip or another releasable The clamping mechanism can move toward and away from the head 161. In the automatic operation room, the lifter 165 of the bracket 160 can move the head 161 to the automatic transfer position to accommodate one of the transfer devices. Microelectronic workpiece U4 » 130. After placing the microelectronic workpiece 114 on the receiving surface 162 of the head 161, the lifter 165 can slightly raise the head 161 to provide a vertical gap between the head 161 and the container 152. The head 161 It can then rotate 180 degrees around the head rotation axis 166 (as described above with reference to Figure 2) and the lifter 165 can lower the ^ 161 to the processing station. The foregoing steps are processed to remove The electronic workpiece 114 can be reversed later. The feature described above with reference to FIGS. 1-3 is that the bracket 160 can selectively stop two different positions for accommodating the microelectronic workpiece 114: one is 200306611 for manual placement and A manual transfer position for removing the microelectronic workpiece, and an automatic transfer position for automatically placing and removing the microelectronic workpiece. The number of different positions for manually and automatically transferring the microelectronic workpiece 114 Advantages. For example, when the bracket 160 is in the manual transfer position, the user can be protected from contact with the automatic transfer device, and when the bracket 160 is in the automatic transfer position, the transfer device 13 can take the bracket. 160. The different position may provide a visual cue to the user to indicate when it is appropriate for the user to manually obtain the bracket 160. For example, in the embodiment, the 'user can see the 161 series When placed above the lateral portion 136 of the shield 134, the receiving surface 162 is accessible: for loading and / or unloading. Conversely, when the 帛 i6i system is placed: the shield m When it is below the horizontal feature 136, the user can see that the position is located at the automatic transfer position and cannot manually accommodate or place the electronic workpiece 114. It is not difficult in practical examples, the bracket 160 can be upward and downward Move between the hand positions 詈 Γ: and the automatic transmission position of the child, and rotate between the stations within one mile of the transmission. In other embodiments, the bracket 160 can move between: non-axis movement and / or in any of these three positions in different ways. In some embodiments, the manual transmission position can be adjusted by the user. With two. In another aspect of the embodiment, the k, rotation, for example, a moving shield 134 is protected from accidental contact with the transfer device 130. Only Fig. 4 is an isometric view of a transfer device 13o according to the present invention. In one of the viewpoints of column M, the conveying device 130 includes an automatic machine 131 supported by the conveying device 25 200306611 supporting frame 132 (Fig. 3) to move linearly as indicated by arrow c. Therefore, the automatic machine 13 "moves into and out of: the input / output station 11o (Figure D and either of the processing stations 15o (Figure 1) phase = 'standard. The base 137 of the transport device 13o It can support the elevator 138 J ^ h 'as indicated by arrow D, the upward and downward movement. The elevator 138 can support the arm 139 for rotating movement, as indicated by arrow E. In one embodiment The arm 139 has a single centrifugal convex portion 146 extending from the axis along which the elevator 138 moves, and the convex portion 146 supports the terminal controller 140. Alternatively, the arm 139 can have a plurality of Lu convex portions. The single centrifugal convex portion 146 is less like a plurality of convex device interference with peripheral parts when the arm 139 rotates. In any embodiment, the Y-side terminal controller 140 can be opposite to the arm 139 Rotate individually around a common axis, as shown by arrow F. In one aspect of this embodiment, the robot 丨 3 丨 can be coupled to a coka cable 142 (such as a ribbon cable) A common unit 141. The automatic machine can move linearly as shown by arrow C while There is a limitation from the flexible electric winding 142. In this-embodiment-and further from the point of view, it is necessary that the important part of the control and power circuit for operating the automatic machine 13 1 can be placed in the common unit 141 It is not on the automatic machine 13m itself. The advantage of this device is that the automatic machine 131 can be made smaller and therefore requires less moving space. Fig. 5 is an automatic machine according to an embodiment of the invention 丨A partial cross-sectional view of 31. In one aspect of this embodiment, the upper terminal controller 140a is supported on an inner shaft 144a and the lower terminal 26 200306611 controller 140b is supported on a Zhi Nu Mu is placed on the outer shaft from the inner shaft 144a. The outer shaft 144b "—the outer shaft belt is shown outward in the plane of the" shaft belt office secret # 1 甲 driven ", and The outer shaft belt 145b is driven by an outer shaft pulley (not shown in Fig. 5). The inner two 144a can be face-attached to an inner shaft belt 145a, which is then pre-powered by an inner shaft ▼ wheel 143a. ... because of the upper terminal controller! Directly separated from the lower terminal control H 140b

“。能移動而沒有與其他者的運動相干擾。藉二= %控制器140提供各別電力輸送’每一終端控制器14〇能 與其他者無關移動。例如,一個終端控制器“Ο可置放一 微電子工件114在該支架16〇上(圖3),但此時其他之終 端控制器140仍保留一微電子工件114以用於輸送至一不 同支架160或輸送至該輸入/輸出站11〇(圖丨)。". Can move without interfering with other people's movements. Borrow two =% controller 140 provides separate power transmission 'Each terminal controller 14 can move independently of others. For example, a terminal controller" 〇 可A microelectronic workpiece 114 is placed on the bracket 160 (Figure 3), but at this time other terminal controllers 140 still retain a microelectronic workpiece 114 for transport to a different bracket 160 or to the input / output Station 11 (Figure 丨).

在其他實施例中,該傳送裝置13〇能具有其他架構。 例如忒傳送裝置13 0能攜帶一單一微電子工件1 1 *或是 超過兩個微電子工件114。當該傳送裝置13〇攜帶超過一 個微電子工件114時,就如參考圖4及5之下面所述的, 母一彳政電子工件114的運動能至少部份地獨立。另一選擇 方式地’該傳送裝置1 30能被構成可以整批的安排,例如 ’其具有或不具有一被架構使用在該外殼丨〇2内之各別載 具或容器而自動地一起移動複數個微電子工件丨丨4。根據 本發明之其他實施例,該傳送裝置之更詳細觀點被包括 在美國專利申請號第09/875,300號,其於2001年6月 5曰申請以及公佈PCT申請第PCT/US99/14414號並在此 27 200306611 併入做為參考。 ^圖6係根據本發明之一實施例的具有被安排成可相對 該支架座180移動之支架160之裝置1〇〇的剖面側視圖。 就如在圖6中所示’該支架160之載具164能從該支架座 180懸吊,同時該支架座18〇係係置於該處理站15〇之頭 161及該容器152之上方。該支架座180能包括-引導路 徑181,且該支架16〇係沿著該路徑而在介於一操作位置( 圖6所示之實線)與一接取位置(圖6所示之虛線)間移動。 ^該操作位置中,該頭161能如以上所述的被放置成可使 ^子件114手動她或自動地傳送進入或離開該頭。在 該接取位置中,該頭161能橫向地遠離該處理站150以允 η午接取至该容器152。因此’該使用者在當該支架⑽係 在接取位置時可自外殼1()2(例如,為了維修)之前表面 103a取得該容器152。 在此一實施例之一觀點中,該引導路徑181可以是大 體為直線且當該頭相對該容器152移動時,該引導路徑 181係橫向於頭161之垂直運動。在其他實施例中,該引 導路徑181能具有其他的架構。例如,在另一實施例中, 該引導路控1 8 1能被—曲。 在一被揭示在圖6之實施例的更進一觀點中,該全部 支架160被與裝置100中斷並且該支架能藉由在後表面 l〇3b處移動以及//或移除一接取面板184並穿過該外殼 102之後表面l〇3b而被移除。因此,該支架16〇能被從裝 置1 〇〇遙控,並且该使用者能具有穿過該外殼1 〇2之後表 28 200306611In other embodiments, the transmitting device 130 can have other architectures. For example, the transport device 130 can carry a single microelectronic workpiece 1 1 * or more than two microelectronic workpieces 114. When the transfer device 130 carries more than one microelectronic workpiece 114, as described below with reference to Figs. 4 and 5, the motion of the mother-political electronic workpiece 114 can be at least partially independent. Alternatively, the conveying device 130 can be configured to be arranged in batches, for example, it can be moved automatically with or without a separate carrier or container structured to be used in the housing. A plurality of microelectronic workpieces 丨 4. According to other embodiments of the present invention, a more detailed view of the transfer device is included in US Patent Application No. 09 / 875,300, which was filed on June 5, 2001 and published PCT Application No. PCT / US99 / 14414. It is incorporated herein by reference. ^ FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional side view of a device 100 having a bracket 160 arranged to be movable relative to the bracket base 180 according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 6, the carrier 164 of the bracket 160 can be suspended from the bracket base 180, while the bracket base 180 is placed above the head 161 of the processing station 150 and above the container 152. The bracket base 180 can include a guide path 181, and the bracket 160 is along the path between an operating position (the solid line shown in FIG. 6) and an access position (the dotted line shown in FIG. 6). Between moves. ^ In the operating position, the head 161 can be placed as described above so that the child piece 114 can be manually or automatically transmitted into or out of the head. In the pick-up position, the head 161 can be laterally away from the processing station 150 to allow pick-up to the container 152 at noon. Therefore, the user can obtain the container 152 from the front surface 103a of the housing 1 () 2 (for example, for maintenance) when the holder is in the access position. In one aspect of this embodiment, the guide path 181 may be substantially straight and when the head moves relative to the container 152, the guide path 181 is a vertical movement transverse to the head 161. In other embodiments, the guide path 181 can have other architectures. For example, in another embodiment, the guidance path control 181 can be curved. In a further aspect disclosed in the embodiment of FIG. 6, the entire bracket 160 is interrupted from the device 100 and the bracket can be moved and / or removed by an access panel 184 at the rear surface 103b It passes through the rear surface 103b of the housing 102 and is removed. Therefore, the stand 160 can be remotely controlled from the device 100, and the user can have the housing 100 passed through the housing. Table 28 200306611

面103b之另外接取$兮& 1CA 要取至该至150及該容器152。在此一實施 例之一觀點中,該古加汁7 ΟΛ &, 支木座180包括一軌道裝置以用於該支 架160之線性運動,其如在參考圖7及8之以下更詳細描 述籌的。在其他實施例中,該支架座18〇能具有用於相對 於該室150以及/或相對於該裝置100之移動該支架16〇 的其他架構。例如’在其他實施例中,該支架160能繞一 或更多軸來樞軸以允許接取該室150。The other access to the face 103b is to get to the 150 and the container 152. In one aspect of this embodiment, the gujia juice 70 Λ &, wooden stand 180 includes a track device for linear movement of the bracket 160, as described in more detail below with reference to FIGS. Raised. In other embodiments, the stand base 180 can have other structures for moving the stand 160 relative to the chamber 150 and / or relative to the device 100. For example, in other embodiments, the support 160 can be pivoted about one or more axes to allow access to the chamber 150.

圖7及8係根據本發明之一實施例的被架構成用於組 裝及移除之支$ 160的部份概略解說。首先參考圖7,該 支架座180能包括一對引導軌道182(其中之一可在圖7視 出)’每-具有—沿著該支架引導路徑i8i對準之線性通道 183 „亥支* 160之載具164包括可滑動地容納在該通道 183内之引導元件174。因此,該載具164能自引導軌道 1 82被懸吊或至少部份地懸吊。Figures 7 and 8 are schematic illustrations of parts of a quilt that constitute $ 160 for assembly and removal according to one embodiment of the present invention. Referring first to FIG. 7, the bracket base 180 can include a pair of guide rails 182 (one of which can be seen in FIG. 7). 'Every-have-' a linear channel 183 aligned along the bracket guide path i8i. The carrier 164 includes a guide element 174 slidably received in the channel 183. Therefore, the carrier 164 can be suspended or at least partially suspended from the guide rail 182.

在此-實施例的更進一觀點中,該載具164能包可允 許載具在該裝i HH)内被對準及被放置之特點。例如,該 載具164包括複數個置放器# 17〇,其被揭示有一上部置 放器球170a以及-對下部置放器球mb(其中之—可在圖 7視出)。該裝置1〇〇包括—具有被架構容納該上部置放器 球170a之-上部支樓支架169的上部支撐樑咖。該裝 置1〇〇能更包括一具有兩個下部支樓支架175之下部支撐 樑168b,其包括一左下部支撐支架n5a及一下部支撐^ 架175b(圖7未視出)並被置放可容納該下部置放器球㈣ 29 200306611 在此-實施例中,該上部支標支架169具有被安排成 可與該上部置放器球17Ga相接觸之定位表面17卜該上部 支撐支架169係可向前後調整的,其如在箭頭g所示。當 組裝% ’該上部支撐支架169之向前及向後位置能被調整 直到該載具164係被垂直地對準。一旦該载具164被適當In a further aspect of this embodiment, the characteristics of the carrier 164 can allow the carrier to be aligned and placed within the device. For example, the vehicle 164 includes a plurality of placers # 170, which are revealed to have an upper placer ball 170a and-to the lower placer ball mb (of which-which can be seen in Fig. 7). The device 100 includes an upper supporting beam coffee having an upper holder ball 169 which is structured to receive the upper placing ball 170a. The device 100 can further include a lower support beam 168b having two lower support brackets 175, which includes a left lower support bracket n5a and a lower support bracket 175b (not shown in Fig. 7) and can be placed in a Receiving the lower placement device ball 29 200306611 In this embodiment, the upper support bracket 169 has a positioning surface 17 arranged so as to be in contact with the upper placement device ball 17Ga. It is adjusted forward and backward as shown by arrow g. When assembled, the forward and backward positions of the upper support bracket 169 can be adjusted until the carrier 164 is vertically aligned. Once the vehicle 164 is properly

.皆準 纟有問173之鎖機構1 72能被致動以固持該上 部置放器球ma頂靠該定位表面171。為了移動或移除該 載具164’該鎖機才舞172係被釋放。而允許該載4 164向 後地繞該下部置放器球170b作樞轉,其如箭頭㈣指出 及在圖7中之虛線所揭示)。在經該载具164已如在圖7中 所示之向後地樞轉後,該下部置放器#⑽能從該下部 支撐支架175移除並且該載具164能被移動至取位置之更 後處’以及/或從該裝£ 100被移除,其如參圖6之以上 所述。Both are accurate. The lock mechanism 1 72 of question 173 can be actuated to hold the upper placer ball ma against the positioning surface 171. In order to move or remove the vehicle 164 ' Instead, the carrier 4 164 is allowed to pivot backwards about the lower placement ball 170b, as indicated by the arrow ㈣ and disclosed by the dashed line in FIG. 7). After the vehicle 164 has been pivoted rearwardly as shown in FIG. 7, the lower placement device # ⑽ can be removed from the lower support bracket 175 and the vehicle 164 can be moved to a more accessible position. 'Behind' and / or removed from the package £ 100, as described above with reference to FIG.

圖8係在裝置100内之至少部份地被引導元件m所 支樓的部份支帛16〇之部份概略分解後視圖。在此—實施 例的一觀點中,該引導元件174能被滑動地容納該引導軌 道182内。在另一施例中,該引導元件174能包括沿著該 引導軌道182滚動之車輪’並且在其他實施例中,該震置 1〇〇能包括可允許用於在該支架160與該支❹18〇間之 相對運動之其他安排。在們何這些實施例中,該支擇載且 164能包括-被架構成可釋放地容納—電繞(未揭示)之電 端163卩及-被架構成可釋放地容納一空氣導管(未揭示) 之空氣端167。該電端163以及空氣端167在未自該裝置 30 ^UUJU6611 于、。亥支架l6〇之前可從該載具164分離。 、揭示在圖8中之裝置1 〇〇的一實施例之一觀點中 μ下#支撑支架175(被揭示有該左下部支撐 及該下部主栲±加 卞W5a 芽支木175b)能架構成調適該載具164之橫向 對 。 J如’該左下部支撐支架175a包括一大致平扭 表面176,曰分 一内 5亥下部置放器球17〇b之對應一個可沿著該表 面/月動。該下部支撐支架175b能包括一容納支架177,其FIG. 8 is a schematic exploded rear view of a portion of a support 1600 of at least a part of a building supported by a guide element m in the device 100. FIG. In this aspect of the embodiment, the guide member 174 can be slidably received in the guide rail 182. In another embodiment, the guide element 174 can include wheels that roll along the guide track 182, and in other embodiments, the shock 100 can include allowable use for the bracket 160 and the support Other arrangements for the relative movement between ❹180. In these embodiments, the optional load and 164 can include-a quilt constitutes a releasable accommodation-an electric winding (not disclosed) 163 卩 and-a quilt constitutes a releasable accommodation of an air duct (not Revealed) Air End 167. The electric terminal 163 and the air terminal 167 are not connected to the device 30 ^ UUJU6611. The stent 16 can be detached from the carrier 164 before. In the viewpoint of an embodiment of the device 100 shown in FIG. 8, the μ ## support bracket 175 (the left lower support and the lower main support ± plus W5a bud branch wood 175b is disclosed) can be constructed. Adjust the horizontal alignment of the vehicle 164. As described above, the left lower support bracket 175a includes a substantially flat twisted surface 176, and a corresponding one of the lower placement ball 17b can be moved along the surface / month. The lower support bracket 175b can include a receiving bracket 177, which

係1皮架構成容納其他下部置放器球1 70b及至少限制其他 下P置放器球之運動以提供用於該載具i 64之額外支撐。 因此4谷納支架1 77能如箭頭I所示使用調整螺釘1 78 而1側向地調整。The leather frame is configured to accommodate the other lower placement ball 1 70b and at least restrict the movement of the other lower placement ball to provide additional support for the vehicle i 64. Therefore, the 4 gnar bracket 1 77 can be adjusted laterally using the adjusting screw 1 78 as shown by the arrow I.

參考圖6-8之以上所述裝置1〇〇實施例之一特點係該 支架160能被一允許該支架16〇之運動之一支撐座18〇所 支撐,但該支架160之重量仍被裝置1〇〇支撐。因此,當 接取該處理站150下面時,重放置該支架16〇可以是較容 易。此一特點之另一優點是穿過裝置1〇〇之後表面丨〇讣 而從该裝置100完全地移除該支架係較容易。 該支架160之一實施例之另一優點是該支架是從一置 於該處理站150之上方被攜帶。此一特點之優點是該支架 160並不需要佔據該頭161底下之空間以及鄰近該處理站 150。反而,此一空間能被空下來(例如,去接取該處理站 150)或能被用於該處理站15〇之額外支撐設備所佔據。此 一裝置之另一優點是介於該支架16〇與該電單元1〇5間之 可提供電力及控制訊號之電纜能更短,此乃因該支架16〇 31 200306611 係被放置在更罪近該電單元i 〇5。此一裝置之尚有一優點 是當該電纜被耦合至該支撐載具164日夺,它能被被完全地 放置在該處理M 150之上方。因此,用於該電纜與在該處 理站1 50内之化學物相接觸之類似物能被減少以及/或消 除。 圖9-18係解說被包括在類似在圖1-8所述之工具内的 處理站之數個細節。—廣泛多樣微電子工件處理技術可使 用比如下面所述之處理站的組合而同時以及/或依序地完 成。在更進而實施例巾,該處理站能具有除了或取代以下 所述的特性以提供不同以及/或額外功能。在一代表性處 理中,微電子工件能在一度量站(圖9)被評估。材質可在 一電化學沈積站(圖U·14或無電沈積站(圖15)處被施加至 該微電子工件以及/或被強化以及/或被修復以產生比如 那些被揭示在圖1〇中之層。該工件能在一小型封裝室(圖 16Α·Β)被傾斜蝕刻及清洗以及/或在一喷灑站(圖被漂 洗,以及在一熱處理站(圖18)被退火。在其他實施例中, δ亥裝置能完成其他處理以及/或其他順序。 度量站 圖9係被包括在如上參考圖υ所述之一或更多處理 站150之一度量站9〇〇的略解說圖。在此一實施例之一觀 點中’該度量ϋ 900 &括一具有一或更多被架成可移除地 支撐該微電子工件114之支架920的底座91〇。當該微電 子工件114被該支架920攜帶時,一偵測器93〇操作地耦 合至該微電子工件114。該偵測器93〇能被架構成镇測在 32 200306611 該微電子工件114上之一傳導層(比如一種子層或一覆蓋層 )的均勻度或其他傳導特性。在此一實施例之另一觀點中, 該摘測器930能使用片電阻或電容以決定該傳導層之厚度 。另一選擇方式地,該偵測器930能使用光或熱技術以決 定該微電子工件114之被選定特性。在另一實施例中,。 該偵測器930能包括一以雷射為基礎的非固定系統,且在 该系統中’一射出的雷射可感應出在該微電子工件114之 該層内的一聲音響應。該聲音響應係接著相關於之厚度。 此係已知為如一脈衝刺激熱散射(ISTS)系統。一如此系統 是在麻薩諸塞州,Natick市之” Philip Analytical,,公司所製 造,其名為,,脈衝,,或,,綠寶石,,。另一合適度量單元係被 紐澤西州之Flanders市的Rudolph公司所製造,其名為 ”Metapulse”。 在前實施例中,該偵測器930能被操作地耦合至一分 析器940以分析以及/或其他方式處理被該偵測器93〇接 收之資料。該分析器940可被耦合至一控制器95〇。且該 控制器950接著以一鏈960被耦合至一或更多該工具(圖 1)之其他處理站。因此,在該度量站9〇〇所獲得之資料能 被用來影響在其他處理站所進行之處理,就如在下更詳細 描述中。 在一貫施例,該度量站900能被使用在一,,向前饋送,, 模式中。因此,該度量站900所獲得之結果能被用來以一 考慮到該特定微電子工件114之獨有特性的方式來影響以 及/或控制被完在該微電子工件114上之後續處理。另一 33 200306611 k擇方式地,5亥度置站900能被使用在一,,饋 在此-模式中,該微電子―在經一已選;=完 成在該微電子工件114 i之後被分析,並且該結果能被用 來影響該相同處理被完成在其他微電子工件之方式。,,向前 饋达及’’回饋”處理的例子係在下面更詳細描述。 在一向前饋送操作模式中,用於一或更多下游處理能 基於在該度量站900所獲得的結果來修正。另一選擇方式 地,或增加地,被實現之後續處理的順序能基於該量度站 結果來修正。例如,如果該微電子工件114之一種子層之 厚度或均勻度係在接受極限之外時,該微電子工件丨14能 ^被輸送至一電艘站(參考圖i〇a-15之以下更詳細描述)之 前而被輸送至一種子層強化站(亦參考圖10A-15之以下更 詳細描述)。另一選擇方式地,如果該種子層係如此超過忍 受度以致於其不能在種子層強化站被修復或被強化,則該 楗電子工件U4能輸送至一材質移除站(參考圖16A-17之 以下更詳細描述),且在該站内該微電子工件ιΐ4能被蝕刻 。該微電子卫彳114能接著被返回至-種子層強化站,比 如位於1〇〇外部之一物理氣相沈積(PVD)裝置。 在一實轭例中,在該度量站900所獲得的結果能被用 來影響不僅該微電子卫彳114在離開該度量之後應 前往何處,且亦影響到在下一處理站完成在㈣電子工件 114之處理的面貌。例如,在沈積以及/或毯子金屬層, 毯子介電層’ ®案化金屬層以及圖案化介電層之替換期間 所使用之處理參數能被建立,變更,調整或是基於在該度 34 200306611 量站900所獲得的結果所作之其他方式控制。在一實施例 中,可弓丨人一在一參數(例如,薄膜厚度)之故意、改變以用 於非均勻度(例如,線寬)之補償而產生均勻電性結果。 ^在其他實施例中,該用者能取得在該度量站900所獲 得的結果並決停止後續處理直到相關於前面處理之間題已 被解決為止。例如,覆蓋層電鍍站在#該種子層厚度被發 現,低於可接受容限度時被停止。另一選擇方式地,該用 者能繼續後續處理(即電鍍處理)並且基於自該度量站_ 2輸出來调整後續處理步驟或處理參數。例如,該用者能 、< ”亥電鍍處理,但是可再次基於在該度量站所獲得 的結果而自動地調整處理配方以達到可接受電鍍均勻度及 厚度。 在回饋操作模式中,該度量站900能在該微電子工 件1丨4到達之前變更正常進行的處理。例如,在一電化學 沈積(ECD)處理取得均勾度或是㉟腳期間所施加的材質 之其他特性之後,該微電子工件114被放置在該度量站 =0内。如果所施加的材質之均勻度或其他特性被發現到 退離可接受容限度時,被進行在該勵站之處理配方能在 /、他u電子工件丨丨4具有類似初始特性之前被調整。 二如,如果在該度量站900決定具有含固定,已知特性之 -初始種子層之微電子工件114當在後續處理1時自一 ECD站回係具不接受的結果,但當在後續處理2時自一 CD站回係具可接受的結果時,則該控制器950能在當其 他具有似初始種子層之微電子工件114將被處理時而自動 35 200306611 地引導該ECD站去使用處理2。 在其他實例中,該度量站9〇〇能具有其他的安排。用 於該處理站900之其他實例中的例子係被包括在國際申請 案 pct/us〇1/21579(代理人案件第 29195 8U7w〇 號^ 於2001 + 7月9日巾請並在此全部併人做為參考。在任 何這些實施射,該控制H 95G能制來控制行在該工具 1〇〇(圖1)内之任何站處之處理,另一選擇方式地,該控制 器950能被操作地耦合至位於該工具1〇〇外部之裝置以控 制在該裝置内進行之處理。例如,材f可以在—被放置該 工具100外部之化學機械平坦化(CMp)裝置内自該微電子 工件114移除掉。 材質施加站 圖10A-15係解說適用於施加材質至該微電子工件ιΐ4 之站。這些站包括能在一電化學處理中施加材質之電化學 沈積站(ECD),以及能在一非電化學處理中施加材質之無 電站。ECD站(參考圖U-14之以下更詳細描述)能被用來 施加傳導材質,比如銅,在呂,白金,焊球或金。該傳導材 質能被施加為如一新覆蓋層或用來強化或修復現存種子層 。因此,任何這些站能作用如一種子層強化/修復站。適 用於實現如此功能之處理及溶液的例子是包括在國際申請 案PCT/US99/06036中,其於1999年3月22日申請並在 此全部併入做為參考。另一選擇方式地,(例如,在金屬沈 積期間藉由反轉被施加至極之極性),這些站能在一電泳 處理中被用來施加絕緣材質。該無電站(參考圖15之以下 36 200306611 描述)亦能被用來施加傳導材質,比如覆蓋層或種子層修復 /強化材質,而沒有應用電流。 圖10A-10E解說根據本發明之實施例之以材質施加站 來進行的作為樣本之處理。以圖丨〇 A做為開始,該微電子 工件114包括一特點比如一壕溝! 0丨2,其係將被填有一金 屬或其他傳導材質。一薄障礙層1010被沈積在該微電子 工件114之上及該壕溝1〇12内。另一選擇方式地,該障 礙層1010能被沈積在一介電材質,比如二氧化矽之上。 在任一實施例中,該障礙層1010能包括氮化鈕,氮化鈦 ,或其他能作用為防止後續置放在該壕溝1〇12内之傳導 材質免於遷移進入該微電子工件114之其他外貌區。該障 礙層1010能使用已知技術來沈積,比如化學氣相沈積 (CVD)或物理氣相沈積(PVD)。 現請參考圖10B,一超薄金屬種子層1〇11被沈積在該 障礙層10 10上。在一實施例中,該超薄金屬種子層丨〇 i工 包括銅,及在另一實施例中,超薄金屬種子層1〇11能包 括其他材質。在們一實施例中,該超薄金屬種子層l〇i i 可使用CVD,PVD或其他技術來沈積。 在此一實施例之一觀點中,該超薄金屬種子層1〇11能 被沈積至僅約50埃至大約5〇〇埃之一厚度。因此,空洞 1013或其他非均勻度可能在經形成該種子層1〇11後,仍 保留在該種子層1011内。就如在圖1〇c中所示,該種子 層1011藉由額外施加傳導強化材質1014在該超薄金屬種 子層1011上以填充該空洞1〇13内而予以強化。因此,該 37 200306611 障礙層ΗΗ0能以傳導材質而被完全地或幾乎完全地蓋住 〇 就如在圖10D中所示,—覆蓋層1G15被沈積在該強 化材質1014及該超薄金屬種子層1〇11之上以填入該壕溝 W12内。在經該壕溝1〇12被填入後,部份該障礙層1〇1〇 ,超薄金屬種子層1011,該強化材質1014,以及位置在 該壕溝1012上方之該覆蓋層1〇15能被移除,而留下一線 =通孔H)66’其如在圖n中所示。該前述之步驟能被重 復以建立在該微電子工件114内之傳導結構的層疊層。 整個站案安排 圖11解6兒一具有一支架1160及一被架構成用於置放 電化學處理站1100強化材質以及/或覆蓋層之容器組件 1152,其如在參考圖1〇A_1〇E所示之以上所述的。該支架 1160包括一自轉馬達1161,一被耦合至該自轉馬達"Η 之轉子1162,以及一被該轉子1162攜帶之接觸組件ιΐ7〇 。該接觸組件1170能被架構成與該微電子工件114之該 前側及該後側之一者相接觸。該轉子1162具有一背襯平 板1163及一密封1164。該背襯平板1163能在介於該背襯 平板1163接觸該工件114之背側的一第一位置(被揭示在 圖1 1之貫線)與5亥责襯平板遠離該工件1 1 4之背侧的一第 二位置(被揭示在圖11之虛線)間之橫向移動至該微電子工 件114(箭頭丁)。該接觸組件117〇具有一支撐圈1172,複 數個被該支撐圈1172攜帶之接觸1173,以及複數個延伸 在介於該支撐圈11 72與該轉子丨丨62間之軸丨丨7丨,該接觸 38 200306611 1173可以是圈型彈簧接觸或其他型接觸,其係被架構成與 在該工件114上之一部份種子層相連接。市面上可購得支 架1160及接觸組件1170能被使用在站11〇〇中。特定適 用之支架1160及接觸組件1170係揭露在美國專利第6, 228,232及6,080,691 ;以及美國申請案第〇9/385, 784 09/386,803 ; 09/386197 ; 09/501,〇〇2 ; 09/733, 608及09/804,696 ;這些全部在此併入做為參考。 該容器組件1152包括一外部容器n53(概略地示於圖 11)及一被放置在該外部容器1153内之内部容器1154(亦 概略地示於圖11)。該内部容器n54攜帶至少一電極(圖 11未示出)並且引導一電處理溶液流至該工件丨丨4。該電處 理溶液,例如,能流溢過一堰(箭頭w)並且進入該外部容 器1153,且該外部容器捕捉該電處理溶液並送它回去至一 槽。内部容器1154之一些實施例係考圖12_14而被揭示及 詳細描述。 在操作中,該支架1160固持該工件丨14在一該内部容 态1154之工件處理處μ,所以該工件丨14之至少一電鍍 表面接合處理溶液。一電埸係藉由在該工件114之電鍍表 面(經由該接觸組件1170)與内部容器1154内之一或更多 電極間施加一電位而建立的。例如,該接觸組件ιΐ7〇能 以一相對於在該内部容器1154内之電極為一負電位來偏 壓以電鍍材質至工件上。另一選擇方式地,該接觸組件 1170能以一相對於在該内部容器1154内之電極為一正電 位來偏Μ以(a)自該工彳114去電錢或電抛光電鍍後材質或 39 200306611 (b)沈積其他金屬(即電泳阻劑)。一般而言,因此,依賴被 使用在電化學處理中之特定材質型而定,可以該工件Η# 做為如一陰極或是一陽極而自該工件114移除材質或是在 該工件上沈積材質。 單一電極站 圖12係一根據本發明實施例之一具有在一外部容器 1253内放置之一内部容器1254的容器組件1252之剖面側 視圖。在此一實施例觀點中,該内部容器1254具有一用 於電化學處理該微電子工件114(被揭示在圖12中而沒有 支架160)之單一電極1230。在其實施例中,該容器組件 ^52係參考圖丨3_ 14而在以下更詳細說明。 在被揭示於圖12中之實施例之一觀點中,該外部容器 1253攜帶一排氣圈122〇,其接著攜帶該内部容器1254, 且該内部容器被自該排氣圈122〇環狀向内地置放。該内 部容器1254包括一以網1257連接至一該内部容器1254 之内部側壁1256。該該内部容器1254包括排氣埠1221, 其可允許在該内部容器1254内生成之氣體輻射向外地流 過。在該排氣圈1220内之一或更多排氣出口 1222可收集 該氣體且將它自該容器組件1252移除。 該内部容器1254可被耦合至一流體輸送導管ι232, 且一電解處理流體可進入穿過該流體輸送導管1232,其如 刖頭j所示。該電解處理流體向上地流過該流體輸送導管 進入該内部容器1254及一堰1259上方。因此,該堰1259 月匕建立在該容器組件1252内之該電解流體的階以用於接 40 200306611 觸該微電子工件114。該電解流體能流溢過該堰丨259並穿 過在該網1257内之口 1258而進入介於該内部容器1254 與該外部容器1253間之區。被隙縫1241隔開之套筒1240 能導引該流體向下地朝向一處理出口 1242,但仍減少使 該流體濺射之趨向,且該濺射趨向能製造在該流體之不必 要氣泡。該流體能在其流穿過該處理出口 1242之後被替 換或回收。一溢流出口 1243提供保護以抵抗該電解流體 的溢流。 该電極1230係被定位在該内部容器1254之内且被支 撐在該流體輸送導管上,例如其係用一更多卡口型配件 來支撐。在此一實施例之一觀點中,該電極工23〇能被附 著至一電極護罩1231,其保護該電極123〇之下部表面且 其以一第一卡口型配件附著至該流體輸送導管1232。該電 極羞罩12 3 1接著以一第二卡口型配件支樓一擴散器丨2 3 5 。該擴散器1235在當電解流體接近該微電子工件114時 能調整該電解流體之流。在此一實施例之更進而觀點中, 電流能藉由被容納在一套管1234内之一電纜1233而被供 應至該電極1230。,且該套管1234通穿過該流體輸送導 吕1232。该電極1230能操作如一陽極(即,用於電鍍該微 電子工件114)及一陰極(即,用於去電鍍該微電子工件 114)之一者。該容器組件1252更進而包括一辅助電極 1230a ’其被架構成可去”偷,,那可能以其他方式電鍍至該接 觸組件1170(圖上之傳導材質。該容器組件之前述及其 他實施例之更詳細係被包括在美國專利第6,228,232 ; 6 41 200306611 ,270 , 647 ,及 ο 多電極站 6,080,291,其全部在此併入做為參考 圖丨3及14概略解說根據本發明之用於電化學以及/ 或電冰地沈積以及/或移除材質質至該微電子工件上之多 極處里占孩夕極處理站之一特點是被施加至該每一電極 之電流能被各別地控制以更精確地控制發生在該微電子工 件114處之移除或沈積處理。例如,被施加至這些電極之 電流被調整以考慮到在該微電子工件114内之初始非均勻 度,或被整修以慎重地形成一非均句沈積層。 首先睛參考圖13,_容器組件1352包括—被環狀地 置放在—外部容器1353内之-内部容器1354。該内部容 器"54能被一穿過一流體導管1332之電解處理流體所供 應"亥/;,L體此以在下面更詳細描述的方式來流穿過該内部 谷态1354 ,並能溢過一堰1359而離開該内部容器丨354。 該流體能接著繼續穿過一被定位在介於該内部容器1354 與該外部容器1353間之螺旋排水通道1340而至一出口 1342,且該流體可從該出口 1342處被丟棄或回收。 進入该流體入口 1332之流體能繼續輻射狀地向外穿過 一盤形加速通道1331,接著向上穿過一被環狀地放置在該 内斗谷器1354内之大致地u型流體流區1332。該口型流 體流區1332形成一前室1344,且該流體流在未進入一在 该内部容器1354之中心處之一主要流體流室1345之前穿 過邊刖室1344。一在該xj型流體流區1332之頂部處的氣 42 200306611 道1343收集在該進入流體内之氣泡且引導該氣泡輕 :向外至w於δ亥内部容器1 354與該外部容器1353間 =區。因此’用於接引在該微電子U4之理表面處的 :泡(其中它們可負面地影響該化學沈積處理)之類似東西 月匕被減少。該流體繼續前進向下穿過_型流體流區1332 至一高壓區1333,接著穿過一擴散器1335至一喷嘴組件 1334。该喷嘴組件1334包括複數個被定位成可引導該流 體以一大致地均勻方式進入該主要流體流室1345。 〇亥主要/现體流至1345能部份地被一輪靡側壁1 338定 義出,且該輪廓側壁係向上地延伸遠離該喷嘴組件i 334。 。亥輪廟側壁13 3 8係被外型化成可平滑轉變該離開喷嘴組 件1334之流從被大致地輻射狀向内導向到被大致地軸狀 向上導向。該輪廓側壁i338能不是陡峭地就是平滑地轉 變至一斜側壁1339,其引導至少流體流之至少一部份輻射 狀向外。該最終速度分佈能產生一自由表面,其在該微電 子工件114被帶入與該流體相接觸之前的最初是圓頂外型 。此一安排之優點是該微電子工件114能迫使任何介於該 自由表面與該微電子工件114間之空氣輻射狀向外排出, 其中就較不像會形成在該微電子工件1 14之處理表面處的 氣泡。 在此一實施例的一觀點中,該内部容器1 354包括複數 個電極(在圖13中之所示如電極1330a-e)。例如,該電極 13 3 0包括一被定位在主要流體流室1 3 4 5内之中心電極 1330e。該中心電極1330e能被定位在鄰近一與該加速通道 43 200306611 1331相連之卡德理流路徑1341。穿過該加速通道][331之 流體流能抽流體向下地遠離該中心電極1 33〇e。且掃除氣 泡遠離該中心電極1330e之表面。穿過該卡德理流路徑之 流亦能控制向上地穿過主要流體流室i 345之流的均勻度 並且能因此控制該撞擊該微電子工件114之中心部份之流 的均勻度。 在該内部容器1354能更進而包括複數個大致環狀電極 (四個被揭示在圖13中如i330a-d)。如果該微電子工件 114係小且並不向外輻射狀延伸超過該輪廓側壁IMS的話 ’並不需電力被施加至該環狀電極133〇a-d。如果該微電 子工件114係向外輻射狀延伸超過該輪廓側壁1 338的話 或更多遠環狀電極133Oa-d被施加電力以提供在該微 電子工件114之外部部份處之電鍍。被施加至該環狀電極 133〇a-d之電力係可在一實施例中是相同,另一選擇方式 地,每一環狀電極133〇a_d能依賴該微電子工件114之初 始特性以及/或將被該電化學沈積處理所獲得的結果而定 來接收不同的電力。該電化學沈積速率亦被該堰1359所 弗J且亥堰1 3 5 9能包括一輻射狀向内延伸過該環狀電 極1330a-d之部份或全部的上方之橫向部份1358。該堰 1359以及該橫向部份1358能容易地從該内部容器1354之 剩餘者移除以整修該橫向部份1358保護該微電子工件114 之程度。 在其他實施例中,該容器組件1352能具有其他的安排 被揭不在圖13中之更^細安排’及另—安排係被包括 200306611 在國際申請案第PCT/US00/10210,其於2000年4月13曰 申請並在此併入做為參考。 圖14根據本發明之另一實施例之一多電極容器組件 1452概略解說。在此一實施例之一觀點中,該多電極容器 組件1452包括一被環狀向内地放置於一外部容器1453内 之一内部容器1454。一介於該内部容器1454與外部容器 1453間之螺旋排水管道1440能容納溢流過該内部容器 1454之流體且以一大致類似於參考圖13之以上所述的方 式來引導該流體朝向一流體出口 1444。流體能穿過一主要 流體入口 1432a及一輔助流體入口 1432b而進入該内部容 器1454。該主要流體入口 1432a係被耦合至一可引導在該 内部容器1454内之流體的一部份至一主要流導引1475之 主要流通道1478。該主要流導引1475包括噴嘴或孔口 1479,其可引導該流朝向該内部容器ι454之中心軸。該 流能繼續從該主要流導引1475向上地前進朝向該微電子 工件1 14。 該輔助流體入口 1432能被耦合至一可引導該輔助流體 至複數個電極之分配器1470。在此一實施例之一觀點中, 該内部容器1454包括四個電極(被揭示在圖14中如143〇心 d)。在此一實施例之一觀點中,該電極143〇能容納在一具 有複數個被分割物1472隔開之對應電極分隔室ι471 (被揭 示如分隔室1471a-1471d)場整型單元1476内。該分配器 1470可經由對應之複數個分配器通道147〇(被揭示如分配 态1470a-1470d)而引導該輔助流體進入每一分隔室〖οι。 45 200306611 因此,該輔助流體能前進穿過該分配器147〇,通過該電極 1430,及向上地朝向該微電子工件ιΐ4。該場整型單元 1476在㈣電極1430 |生之電場上的影響就有如該電極 M30敎位在每—分隔冑1471之出口處,其如被虛電極 位置1480a-1480d所示。 中,每一分隔室1471具有一孔口 1474,且該流體及氣逆 能通穿過該孔口 1474。因此,被捕捉在每一分隔室147 内之氣泡能輻射狀向外前進穿過每一分隔室147ι之該子丨 被揭示在圖14之容器組件1452的一實施例One of the features of the 100 embodiment of the device described above with reference to FIGS. 6-8 is that the bracket 160 can be supported by a support base 18 that allows movement of the bracket 160, but the weight of the bracket 160 is still by the device 100 support. Therefore, when accessing under the processing station 150, it may be easier to reposition the bracket 160. Another advantage of this feature is that it is easier to completely remove the stent from the device 100 through the surface of the device 100. Another advantage of one embodiment of the stand 160 is that the stand is carried from above the processing station 150. The advantage of this feature is that the stand 160 does not need to occupy the space under the head 161 and is adjacent to the processing station 150. Instead, this space can be vacated (e.g., to access the processing station 150) or can be occupied by additional support equipment for the processing station 150. Another advantage of this device is that the cables that can provide power and control signals between the bracket 16 and the electric unit 105 can be shorter, because the bracket 1631 200306611 is placed in a more sin Near the electric unit i 〇5. Another advantage of this device is that when the cable is coupled to the support vehicle 164, it can be placed completely above the processing M 150. Therefore, analogs used for the cable to come into contact with chemicals in the processing station 150 can be reduced and / or eliminated. Figures 9-18 illustrate several details of a processing station included in a tool similar to that described in Figures 1-8. -A wide variety of microelectronic workpiece processing techniques can be accomplished simultaneously and / or sequentially using a combination of processing stations such as those described below. In still further embodiments, the processing station can have features in addition to or instead of those described below to provide different and / or additional functions. In a representative process, microelectronic workpieces can be evaluated at a metrology station (Figure 9). Materials can be applied to the microelectronic workpiece at an electrochemical deposition station (Figure U · 14 or an electroless deposition station (Figure 15) and / or strengthened and / or repaired to produce, for example, those shown in Figure 10 The workpiece can be obliquely etched and cleaned in a small packaging room (Fig. 16A · B) and / or sprayed in a spraying station (flushing in Figure, and annealed in a heat treatment station (Figure 18). In other implementations In the example, the delta device can perform other processes and / or other sequences. The measurement station FIG. 9 is a schematic illustration of the measurement station 900 included in one of the one or more processing stations 150 described above with reference to FIG. In one aspect of this embodiment, 'the measurement' 900 & includes a base 91 having one or more brackets 920 that are removably supported to support the microelectronic workpiece 114. When the microelectronic workpiece 114 When carried by the holder 920, a detector 930 is operatively coupled to the microelectronic workpiece 114. The detector 930 can be framed to measure a conductive layer (such as 32 200306611) on the microelectronic workpiece 114 (such as A sub-layer or a cover layer) or other conductivity characteristics In another aspect of this embodiment, the picker 930 can use a chip resistor or capacitor to determine the thickness of the conductive layer. Alternatively, the detector 930 can use light or thermal technology to determine the thickness of the conductive layer. Selected characteristics of the microelectronic workpiece 114. In another embodiment, the detector 930 can include a laser-based non-fixed system, and in this system 'a emitted laser can be sensed in An acoustic response in the layer of the microelectronic workpiece 114. The acoustic response is then related to the thickness. This system is known as a pulsed stimulus thermal scattering (ISTS) system. One such system is in Massachusetts, "Natick," manufactured by Philip Analytical, Inc., named ", Pulse, or ,, Emerald,". Another suitable unit of measure is manufactured by Rudolph Corporation, Flanders, NJ. "Metapulse". In the previous embodiment, the detector 930 can be operatively coupled to an analyzer 940 to analyze and / or otherwise process data received by the detector 930. The analyzer 940 can Coupled to a control 95. The controller 950 is then coupled to one or more other processing stations of the tool (Figure 1) in a chain 960. Therefore, the data obtained at the metrology station 900 can be used to influence the The processing performed by other processing stations is as described in more detail below. In a consistent embodiment, the metrology station 900 can be used in a, feed forward, mode. Therefore, the results obtained by the metrology station 900 Can be used to influence and / or control subsequent processing done on the microelectronic workpiece 114 in a way that takes into account the unique characteristics of the particular microelectronic workpiece 114. Another 33 200306611 alternative mode, 5 Hai The degree set 900 can be used in one, and in this mode, the microelectronics-after being selected; = completed is analyzed after the microelectronic workpiece 114 i, and the results can be used to affect the The same processing is done in the way of other microelectronic workpieces. Examples of feedforward and "feedback" processing are described in more detail below. In a feedforward operation mode, one or more downstream processes can be modified based on the results obtained at the metrology station 900 Alternatively, or in addition, the order of subsequent processing to be implemented can be modified based on the measurement station results. For example, if the thickness or uniformity of a seed layer of the microelectronic workpiece 114 is outside the acceptance limit At this time, the microelectronic workpiece can be transported to an electric ship station (refer to Figure 10a-15 for a more detailed description below) and then to a sub-layer strengthening station (also refer to Figure 10A-15 or below). More detailed description.) Alternatively, if the seed layer is so tolerated that it cannot be repaired or strengthened at the seed layer strengthening station, the cymbal electronic workpiece U4 can be transported to a material removal station ( Refer to Figures 16A-17 for a more detailed description below), and the microelectronic workpiece ΐ4 can be etched in the station. The microelectronic guard 114 can then be returned to the -seed layer strengthening station, such as one located outside 100 A physical vapor deposition (PVD) device. In a real yoke example, the results obtained at the metrology station 900 can be used to affect not only where the microelectronic satellite 114 should go after leaving the metrology, but also affect By the next processing station, the appearance of the processing of the electronic workpiece 114 is completed. For example, the processing used during the deposition and / or blanket metal layer, blanket dielectric layer'® patterned metal layer and patterned dielectric layer replacement Parameters can be established, changed, adjusted, or controlled in other ways based on the results obtained at the measuring station 900 in 2003 3406611. In one embodiment, one can set a parameter (for example, film thickness) Intentionally, changed for compensation of non-uniformity (eg, line width) to produce uniform electrical results. ^ In other embodiments, the user can obtain the results obtained at the metrology station 900 and stop subsequent processing. Until the problem related to the previous processing has been solved. For example, the overlay plating station is found #the thickness of the seed layer is found and stopped when it is below the acceptable tolerance. Alternatively, the application The user can continue the subsequent processing (ie, the plating process) and adjust the subsequent processing steps or processing parameters based on the output from the metrology station _ 2. For example, the user can, < The results obtained are automatically adjusted to achieve acceptable plating uniformity and thickness. In the feedback operation mode, the metrology station 900 can change the processing that is normally performed before the microelectronic workpieces 1 and 4 arrive. For example, after an electrochemical deposition (ECD) process obtains uniformity or other characteristics of the material applied during lameness, the microelectronic workpiece 114 is placed within the metrology station = 0. If the uniformity or other characteristics of the applied material are found to fall out of acceptable tolerances, the processing formula at the excitation station can be adjusted before the electronic workpieces and other electronic workpieces have similar initial characteristics. Second, if at the metrology station 900, it is determined that the microelectronic workpiece 114 with the fixed and known characteristics-the initial seed layer will return unacceptable results from an ECD station at the subsequent processing 1, but when the subsequent processing At 2 o'clock from the CD station with acceptable results, the controller 950 can automatically guide the ECD station to use the processing when other microelectronic workpieces 114 with an initial seed layer are to be processed. 2. In other examples, the metrology station 900 can have other arrangements. Examples used in other examples of the processing station 900 are included in the international application pct / us〇1 / 21579 (Agent Case No. 29195 8U7w〇 ^ on 2001 + July 9 For reference, in any of these implementations, the control H 95G can control the processing performed at any station within the tool 100 (Figure 1). Alternatively, the controller 950 can be controlled by Operatively coupled to a device located outside the tool 100 to control the processing performed within the device. For example, the material f can be removed from the microelectronics in a chemical mechanical planarization (CMp) device placed outside the tool 100 Workpiece 114 is removed. Material application stations Figures 10A-15 are illustrations of stations suitable for applying materials to the microelectronic workpiece. These stations include an electrochemical deposition station (ECD) capable of applying materials in an electrochemical process, and Non-power station capable of applying materials in a non-electrochemical process. ECD stations (described in more detail below in Figure U-14) can be used to apply conductive materials, such as copper, in Lu, platinum, solder balls or gold. The Conductive material can be applied as a new overlay Layers may be used to strengthen or repair existing seed layers. Therefore, any of these stations can function as a sub-layer strengthening / repair station. Examples of treatments and solutions suitable for achieving such functions are included in the international application PCT / US99 / 06036, It was filed on March 22, 1999 and is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Alternatively, (eg, by inverting the polarity applied to the poles during metal deposition), these stations can be processed in an electrophoresis It is used to apply insulation materials. The non-power station (refer to 36 200306611 described below in Figure 15) can also be used to apply conductive materials, such as overlay or seed layer repair / reinforcement materials, without applying current. Figure 10A-10E Explain the processing as a sample using a material application station according to an embodiment of the present invention. Starting with Figure 丨 OA, the microelectronic workpiece 114 includes a feature such as a trench! 0 丨 2, which will be filled There is a metal or other conductive material. A thin barrier layer 1010 is deposited on the microelectronic workpiece 114 and in the trench 1012. Alternatively, the barrier layer 1010 can be deposited A dielectric material, such as silicon dioxide. In any embodiment, the barrier layer 1010 can include a nitride button, titanium nitride, or other conductive material that can prevent subsequent placement in the trench 1012. The material is prevented from migrating into other appearance areas of the microelectronic workpiece 114. The barrier layer 1010 can be deposited using known techniques, such as chemical vapor deposition (CVD) or physical vapor deposition (PVD). Now refer to FIG. 10B, An ultra-thin metal seed layer 1011 is deposited on the barrier layer 10 10. In one embodiment, the ultra-thin metal seed layer includes copper, and in another embodiment, the ultra-thin metal seed layer The layer 1011 can include other materials. In one embodiment, the ultra-thin metal seed layer 10i i can be deposited using CVD, PVD, or other techniques. In one aspect of this embodiment, the ultra-thin metal seed layer 1011 can be deposited to a thickness of only about 50 angstroms to about 500 angstroms. Therefore, the void 1013 or other non-uniformity may remain in the seed layer 1011 after the seed layer 1011 is formed. As shown in FIG. 10c, the seed layer 1011 is strengthened by additionally applying a conductive strengthening material 1014 on the ultra-thin metal seed layer 1011 to fill the cavity 1013. Therefore, the 37 200306611 barrier layer ΗΗ0 can be completely or almost completely covered with a conductive material. As shown in FIG. 10D, the cover layer 1G15 is deposited on the reinforced material 1014 and the ultra-thin metal seed layer. 1011 to fill the trench W12. After filling in the trench 1012, part of the barrier layer 1010, ultra-thin metal seed layer 1011, the reinforced material 1014, and the cover layer 1015 located above the trench 1012 can be filled. Removed, leaving a line = through hole 66) 66 'as shown in Figure n. The foregoing steps can be repeated to build up a layer of conductive structure within the microelectronic workpiece 114. The entire station arrangement is illustrated in FIG. 11. A container assembly 1152 with a bracket 1160 and a quilt constitutes a reinforced material and / or cover of the chemical treatment station 1100, as described in reference to FIGS. 10A-10E. Shown above. The bracket 1160 includes a rotation motor 1161, a rotor 1162 coupled to the rotation motor "Η", and a contact assembly ιΐ70 carried by the rotor 1162. The contact assembly 1170 can be configured to be in contact with one of the front side and the rear side of the microelectronic workpiece 114. The rotor 1162 has a backing plate 1163 and a seal 1164. The backing plate 1163 can be located at a first position between the backing plate 1163 and the back side of the workpiece 114 (disclosed in FIG. 11) and the 5th lining plate is away from the workpiece 1 1 4 A micro-electronic workpiece 114 (arrow D) is laterally moved between a second position on the back side (disclosed by the dotted line in FIG. 11). The contact assembly 117 has a support ring 1172, a plurality of contacts 1173 carried by the support ring 1172, and a plurality of shafts extending between the support ring 11 72 and the rotor 丨 丨 62. The contact 38 200306611 1173 can be a coil spring contact or other type of contact, which is connected to a part of the seed layer on the workpiece 114 by a frame structure. Commercially available brackets 1160 and contact assemblies 1170 can be used in the station 1100. Specific applicable brackets 1160 and contact assemblies 1170 are disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 6,228,232 and 6,080,691; and U.S. Application Nos. 09/385, 784 09 / 386,803; 09/386197; 09 / 501, 002; 09/733, 608 and 09/804, 696; all of which are incorporated herein by reference. The container assembly 1152 includes an outer container n53 (schematically shown in Fig. 11) and an inner container 1154 (also schematically shown in Fig. 11) placed in the outer container 1153. The inner container n54 carries at least one electrode (not shown in FIG. 11) and guides an electric processing solution to the workpiece 4. The electroprocessing solution, for example, can flow through a weir (arrow w) and enter the external container 1153, and the external container captures the electroprocessing solution and sends it back to a tank. Some embodiments of the inner container 1154 are disclosed and described in detail with reference to Figs. 12-14. In operation, the holder 1160 holds the workpiece 14 at a workpiece processing position μ in the internal state 1154, so that at least one electroplated surface of the workpiece 14 is bonded to the processing solution. An electric coil is established by applying a potential between the electroplated surface of the workpiece 114 (via the contact assembly 1170) and one or more electrodes in the inner container 1154. For example, the contact assembly 710 can be biased with a negative potential relative to the electrode in the inner container 1154 to plate the material onto the workpiece. Alternatively, the contact assembly 1170 can be biased at a positive potential relative to the electrode in the inner container 1154 to (a) remove electricity from the tool 114 or electro-polished material or 39 200306611 (b) Deposition of other metals (ie electrophoretic resists). Generally speaking, therefore, depending on the specific material type used in the electrochemical treatment, the workpiece Η # can be used as a cathode or an anode to remove the material from the workpiece 114 or deposit a material on the workpiece. . Single Electrode Station FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional side view of a container assembly 1252 having an internal container 1254 placed in an external container 1253 according to an embodiment of the present invention. In the perspective of this embodiment, the inner container 1254 has a single electrode 1230 for electrochemical processing of the microelectronic workpiece 114 (represented in FIG. 12 without the support 160). In its embodiment, the container assembly ^ 52 is described in more detail below with reference to FIGS. 3-14. In one aspect of the embodiment disclosed in FIG. 12, the outer container 1253 carries an exhaust ring 122o, which then carries the inner container 1254, and the inner container is annularly moved from the exhaust ring 122o. Placed in the Mainland. The inner container 1254 includes an inner side wall 1256 connected to a net 1257 by a net 1257. The inner container 1254 includes an exhaust port 1221, which may allow gas radiation generated in the inner container 1254 to flow outward. One or more exhaust outlets 1222 within the exhaust ring 1220 may collect the gas and remove it from the container assembly 1252. The internal container 1254 may be coupled to a fluid transfer conduit 232, and an electrolytic treatment fluid may enter through the fluid transfer conduit 1232, as shown by the hoe j. The electrolytic treatment fluid flows upward through the fluid transfer conduit into the inner container 1254 and above a weir 1259. Therefore, the weir 1259 moon dagger is built in the stage of the electrolytic fluid in the container assembly 1252 for contacting the microelectronic workpiece 114. The electrolytic fluid can flow through the weir 259 and pass through the opening 1258 in the net 1257 to enter the area between the inner container 1254 and the outer container 1253. The sleeve 1240 separated by the slit 1241 can direct the fluid downward toward a processing outlet 1242, but still reduces the tendency of the fluid to sputter, and the sputtering tendency can create bubbles in the fluid without being necessary. The fluid can be replaced or recovered after its flow passes through the processing outlet 1242. An overflow outlet 1243 provides protection against overflow of the electrolytic fluid. The electrode 1230 is positioned within the inner container 1254 and is supported on the fluid delivery conduit, for example, it is supported by a more bayonet-type fitting. In one aspect of this embodiment, the electrode worker 23 can be attached to an electrode shield 1231, which protects the lower surface of the electrode 1230 and is attached to the fluid delivery catheter with a first bayonet-type fitting. 1232. The electrode cover 12 3 1 then supports a diffuser 2 2 5 with a second bayonet-type fitting. The diffuser 1235 can adjust the flow of the electrolytic fluid when the electrolytic fluid approaches the microelectronic workpiece 114. In a further aspect of this embodiment, an electric current can be supplied to the electrode 1230 by a cable 1233 housed in a sleeve 1234. And the sleeve 1234 passes through the fluid transfer guide 1232. The electrode 1230 can operate as one of an anode (that is, for plating the microelectronic workpiece 114) and a cathode (that is, for deplating the microelectronic workpiece 114). The container assembly 1252 further includes an auxiliary electrode 1230a 'its quilt structure can be "stolen," which may be electroplated to the contact assembly 1170 (conductive material in the figure in other ways. The foregoing and other embodiments of the container assembly More detailed information is included in U.S. Patent Nos. 6,228,232; 6 41 200306611, 270, 647, and ο Multi-electrode station 6,080,291, all of which are incorporated herein as reference diagrams. One of the characteristics of a child's pole processing station for electrochemically and / or electro-ice deposition and / or removal of material onto the microelectronic workpiece according to the present invention is that it is applied to each electrode The current can be individually controlled to more precisely control the removal or deposition process that occurs at the microelectronic workpiece 114. For example, the current applied to the electrodes is adjusted to take into account the current within the microelectronic workpiece 114 The initial non-uniformity, or refurbished to carefully form a non-uniform sentence deposition layer. Referring first to FIG. 13, the container assembly 1352 includes-placed in a ring-inside the outer container 1353-the inner container 1354. The Internal capacity " 54 can be supplied by an electrolytically treated fluid passing through a fluid conduit 1332 ", the L body flows through the internal valley state 1354 in a manner described in more detail below, and can overflow a Weir 1359 leaves the inner container 354. The fluid can then continue through a spiral drainage channel 1340 positioned between the inner container 1354 and the outer container 1353 to an outlet 1342, and the fluid can pass from the The outlet 1342 is discarded or recovered. The fluid entering the fluid inlet 1332 can continue to pass radially outward through a disc-shaped acceleration channel 1331, and then upwardly through a circularly placed inside the inner bowl chopper 1354. Roughly u-shaped fluid flow region 1332. The mouth-shaped fluid flow region 1332 forms a front chamber 1344, and the fluid flow passes through the edge before entering a main fluid flow chamber 1345 at the center of the inner container 1354. Chamber 1344. A gas at the top of the xj-type fluid flow zone 1332 42 200306611 Channel 1343 collects bubbles in the incoming fluid and guides the bubbles lightly: outwardly to the inner container 1 354 and the outer container 1353 rooms = zones. So 'for At the physical surface of the microelectronic U4: similar things, such as bubbles, in which they can negatively affect the chemical deposition process, are reduced. The fluid continues to advance downward through the _-type fluid flow zone 1332 to a high pressure Zone 1333 then passes through a diffuser 1335 to a nozzle assembly 1334. The nozzle assembly 1334 includes a plurality of positioned to direct the fluid into the main fluid flow chamber 1345 in a generally uniform manner. Flow to 1345 can be partially defined by a round of sidewalls 1 338, and the contoured sidewalls extend upwardly away from the nozzle assembly i 334. . The side wall 13 3 8 of the Hailun Temple is externally shaped to smoothly transform the flow leaving the nozzle assembly 1334 from being directed radially inward to being directed substantially axially. The profile side wall i338 can be either steep or smoothly transitioned to an inclined side wall 1339, which directs at least a portion of the fluid flow radially outward. The final velocity profile can produce a free surface that is initially dome shaped before the microelectronic workpiece 114 is brought into contact with the fluid. The advantage of this arrangement is that the microelectronic workpiece 114 can force any air between the free surface and the microelectronic workpiece 114 to radiate outward, which is less like the processing that would be formed on the microelectronic workpiece 114. Air bubbles at the surface. In an aspect of this embodiment, the inner container 1 354 includes a plurality of electrodes (shown in Fig. 13 as electrodes 1330a-e). For example, the electrode 1330 includes a center electrode 1330e positioned within the main fluid flow chamber 1 3 45. The center electrode 1330e can be positioned adjacent to a Cardelli flow path 1341 connected to the acceleration channel 43 200306611 1331. The fluid flow through the acceleration channel] [331 can draw fluid downwardly away from the center electrode 133o. And the air bubbles are removed from the surface of the center electrode 1330e. The flow through the Cardelli flow path can also control the uniformity of the flow upward through the main fluid flow chamber i 345 and can therefore control the uniformity of the flow hitting the central portion of the microelectronic workpiece 114. The inner container 1354 can further include a plurality of substantially ring-shaped electrodes (four are shown in FIG. 13 as i330a-d). If the microelectronic workpiece 114 is small and does not extend radially beyond the contoured side wall IMS, no electric power is required to be applied to the ring electrodes 133a-d. If the microelectronic workpiece 114 extends radially beyond the contoured side wall 1 338 or more, far ring electrodes 133Oa-d are applied with electricity to provide plating at the outer portion of the microelectronic workpiece 114. The power system applied to the ring electrode 1330ad can be the same in one embodiment. Alternatively, each ring electrode 1330a_d can depend on the initial characteristics of the microelectronic workpiece 114 and / or Depending on the results obtained by this electrochemical deposition process, different powers are received. The electrochemical deposition rate is also represented by the weir 1359 and the weir 1 359 can include a lateral portion 1358 extending radially inwardly over part or all of the annular electrode 1330a-d. The weir 1359 and the lateral portion 1358 can be easily removed from the remainder of the inner container 1354 to repair the extent to which the lateral portion 1358 protects the microelectronic workpiece 114. In other embodiments, the container assembly 1352 can have other arrangements that are not shown in the more detailed arrangements in FIG. 13 and another—the arrangements are included in 200306611 in International Application PCT / US00 / 10210, which was published in 2000. Application was made on April 13th and incorporated herein by reference. FIG. 14 is a schematic illustration of a multi-electrode container assembly 1452 according to another embodiment of the present invention. In one aspect of this embodiment, the multi-electrode container assembly 1452 includes an inner container 1454 that is annularly placed inwardly in an outer container 1453. A spiral drain pipe 1440 between the inner container 1454 and the outer container 1453 is capable of containing fluid overflowing the inner container 1454 and directing the fluid toward a fluid outlet in a manner substantially similar to that described above with reference to FIG. 13 1444. Fluid can pass through a primary fluid inlet 1432a and a secondary fluid inlet 1432b into the internal container 1454. The primary fluid inlet 1432a is coupled to a primary flow channel 1478 that can direct a portion of the fluid within the internal container 1454 to a primary flow guide 1475. The main flow guide 1475 includes a nozzle or orifice 1479 that can direct the flow toward the central axis of the inner container 454. The flow energy continues upward from the main flow guide 1475 toward the microelectronic workpiece 114. The auxiliary fluid inlet 1432 can be coupled to a dispenser 1470 that can direct the auxiliary fluid to a plurality of electrodes. In one aspect of this embodiment, the inner container 1454 includes four electrodes (disclosed in FIG. 14 as 143 ° d). In one aspect of this embodiment, the electrode 1430 can be housed in a field shaping unit 1476 having a corresponding electrode compartment 471 (disclosed as compartments 1471a-1471d) separated by a plurality of partitions 1472. The distributor 1470 can direct the auxiliary fluid into each compartment via a corresponding plurality of distributor channels 1470 (disclosed as distributed states 1470a-1470d). 45 200306611 Therefore, the auxiliary fluid can advance through the dispenser 1470, through the electrode 1430, and upwardly toward the microelectronic workpiece 4a. The field shaping unit 1476 has an effect on the electric field of the ㈣electrode 1430 as if the electrode M30 is located at the exit of each-partition 胄 1471, as shown by the virtual electrode positions 1480a-1480d. Each of the compartments 1471 has an orifice 1474, and the fluid and gas can pass through the orifice 1474. Therefore, the air bubbles trapped in each compartment 147 can be radiated outward through each of the compartments 147m. One embodiment of the container assembly 1452 shown in FIG. 14 is disclosed

口 1474直到它們離開該内部容器1454。在此一實施例之 另一觀點中,每一分隔室1471包括一介面元件1477(其在 另-實施例中可被消除)。在—實施例中,該介面元件 1477能包括一被架構成可捕捉氣泡及其他雜粒之過濾器, 但仍允許該輔助流體通過朝向該微電子工件ιΐ4。在另一 實施例中,該介面元件1477能包括可允許離子通過朝向Mouth 1474 until they leave the inner container 1454. In another aspect of this embodiment, each compartment 1471 includes an interface element 1477 (which can be eliminated in alternative embodiments). In an embodiment, the interface element 1477 can include a filter that is framed to capture air bubbles and other debris, but still allows the auxiliary fluid to pass through toward the microelectronic workpiece 4. In another embodiment, the interface element 1477 can include

/ U電子工件114之離子膜,但仍防止或大體上防止該輔 助流體免於通過朝向該微電子工件114。反而,該輔助流 體能經由該螺旋排水管道144〇而通穿過該孔口 1474及離 開該内部容器1454。另一方式地,該離子膜能允許該流體 及離子之通過。 在該主要與輔助流體係被隔開之一實施例中,該主要 流體(其接觸該微電子工件丨14)可以是陰極電解液且該輔 助流體(其並不接觸該微電子工# 114)可以是一各別陽極 電解液。此一安排之一優點是其能消除在陽極處之添加物 46 200306611 之/肖耗並且因此需要如在一傳統裝置中經常所需的補充該 添加物。此一特點,與該容器組件1452之,,虛陽極,,觀點相 併合減少”強化實驗,,陽極之需求,其係典型要求一確保在 該陽極上之一致性黑膜以提供一可預測電流分佈。反而, 該電流分佈被該場整型單元1476之架構所控制。 在其他實施例中,該容器組件1452能具有其他排。參 考圖14之以上所述之實施例的更進而詳細觀點及另一安 排係被包括在國際申請案第PCT/xjSOO/lOKO,其於2000 年4月13日申請並在此併入做為參考,以及下述之美國 專利申請案,它們全部在此併入做為參考:2001年5月 31日申睛之第09/872,15 1(代理人案件第29 195.8158US) ’2001年3月12曰申請之第〇9/8〇4,6 96(代理人案件第 29195.81 19US) ; 2001 年 3 月 12 日申請之第 09/804,697( 代理人案件第29195.8120US); 2001年6月5日申請之第 09/875 ’ 3 65(代理人案件第 29195.8156US) ; 2001 年 5 月 4 曰申凊之第09/849,505(代理人案件第29195.81 57US1); 2001年5月24曰申請之第09/866,391(代理人案件第 29195.8157US2);2001 年 5 月 24 日申請之第 09/866, 463(代理人案件第29195 8157US3);及2〇〇1年η月5曰 申凊之第10/008,636(代理人案件第29195.8 172US)。 無電處理站 圖1 5係根據本發明之一實施例之一被架構成用於無電 處理的處理站1 550之部份概略剖面圖。在此一實施例之 一觀點中,該處理站1550能包括一具有一被架構成可容 200306611 納牙過一供應閥組件1580a之一無電處理流體的處理部份 1554之容器組件1552。一流體加熱器1583(被概揭示在圖 15中)可被耦合成與該供應閥組件158〇a相流體連通以加 熱该進入該容器組件1552之流體。在一實施例中,該流 體此被加熱至大約50 C至80 C (例如,可無電電鍍鎳或銅) 之一溫度並且在其他實施例中,該流體能被加熱至其他的 溫度。在另一實施例中,該無電流體能在大氣溫度下被引 入。該處理部份1554包括一堰ι559,且溢過該堰1559之 處理流體倒入一周圍地延伸的溢流通道154〇。該溢流通道 1540此經由一溢流導管1538而被耦合至一廢物閥組件 15 80b以從該處理站155〇除去處理流體。 在此一實施例之一觀點中,該供應閥組件155〇a包括 三個供應閥1581(其中二個可在圖15視出)以在該處理站 1 5 50之不同操作階段中供應三種不同處理流體。一排水閥 1582係被定位在該供應閥1581底下以更完全地將該供應 閥組件1580a排出。該廢物閥組件158〇b能具有一大致類 於該供應閥組件1580a之一安排以送回該不同處理流體至 合適保留槽(未示出 在一實施例中,該處理站1550包括一排氣導管1537 ’其係被定位成當一攜帶有該微電子工件114之支架 1560(其被揭示在圖15中之輪廓)係被容納在該容器組件 1552内時可移除氣體廢棄產物。在此一實施例之一觀點中 ,該支架1560能大致類似參圖n之以上所述的支架116〇 ’但並不需要包括接觸組件1170(圖11)。因此,該支架 48 200306611 1560能支撐該微電子工件114且與該容器組件1552内之 無電處理流體相接觸。 在操件中,一加熱後或未加熱之無電處理流體能經由 δ亥供應閥組件1580a而被引導至該處理部份1 μ4。一無電 ,濕化學沈積處理能發生在介於該微電子工件114與在該 處理部份1554内之處理流體間的介面以沈積一傳導材質 在該微電子工件114上。該無電處理能被用來放置各種傳 導材質在在該微電子工件114上,比如種子層強化以及/ 或修復材質,覆蓋層。或是其他傳導結構。另一選擇方式 地°亥站1550月b被用來從§亥微電子工件114移除材質。 例如,該無電處理站1550或一具有一大致類似架構之站 能被用來從該晶圓之背側蝕刻材質。在一另一裝置中,一 從兩方向引導流朝向該微電子工件114之一處理站能被用 來從該微電子工件114移除材質,其就如參考圖16之以 下坪細描述。 移除站 圖16A-B係根據本發明之實施例之材質移除站1 650 的部份概略解說。該材質移除站165〇或,,剝除單元,,可以是 夕功月b處理密封泫室,其能完成清洗,剝除,斜蝕刻,漂 洗及烘乾操作。在此一實施例之一觀點中,該站工能 破用來從該微電子工件114之前面或元件側移除種子層材 質。另一選擇方式地,該站1650能被用來從該微電子工 件114之任一前面/元件或是從該微電子工件114之任一 月面/非元件側移除傳導材質以及/或非傳導材質。任一 49 200306611 貫施例中,該封該室包括被導至該微電子工件丨14之相對 側的不同流體流以控制從該微電子工件丨14所移除材質的 量° 首先請參考圖16A,該站1650包括一具有一以一驅動 轴1663而被耦合至一轉子ι662之馬達的支架166〇。該轉 子1662能包括一上部室元件ι67〇及一下部室元件ι68〇。 該上部室元件1670係與該下部室元件1680相隔開(例如, 藉向上地移動該支架1660)以允許該微電子工件114被定 位在上述二者之間。該上部室元件丨67〇能包括一上部室鲁 壁1671 ’其可定義一被定位在鄰近該晶圓114之一上部表 面1620的上部室1672。該下部室元件168〇能包括一下部 室壁1681 ’其可定義一被定位在鄰近該微電子工件114之 一下部表面1621的下部室1682。 在操作中,一第一流體(概略地被箭頭F1所示)係經由 一注入喷嘴1684(比如一多埠注入喷嘴)而被引入該站ι65〇 内’穿過一下部室入口 MU且進入該下部室丨682。一第 籲 二流體(概略地被箭頭F2所示)係穿過一上部室入口 1673 而被引入該上部室1 672。 現請參考圖16B,該第一流體F1能向外地沿著該微電 子工件114之下部表面1621前進,但此時該第二流體^2 在當該微電子工件114自轉時輻射狀向外沿著該上部表面 1620刖進。在此一實施例之一觀點中,該上部室元件 1 670此包括一被輕射狀向内地定位成遠離該微電子工件 114之外部邊緣1622的出口管丨6乃,因此,該第一流 50 200306611 能在與該第二流體打合併及前進穿過該出口管1675 則’就往前圍繞該外部邊緣 之-周邊…方。在—另一實例= 能被阻指或移動位置,所以該第-流…不:J:5 該微電子工件114之該上部表面1620 e a 、Λ ^某些應用令’可能需要自該下部表面—刻材質 ’仁仍防止餘刻,除了發生在該周邊區1623夕卜,而不會 上部表面_上。因此,該第一流體η能被選 來包括,劑’及該第二流體F2 &包括一惰性氣體, 比如去離子水。自該周邊區1623移除材f之—優點是如 此將減少在後續微電子工件114之處理期間所可能發生類 似薄膜雪片化及污染的問題m50之更詳細觀點係 被描述在國際申請案第PCT/US99/〇5676,其係於1999年 3月1 5日申請且在此併入做為參考。 噴灑站 圖17係根據本發明之實施例的一被架構成可喷灑一或 籲 更多已選流體至微電子工件m上之一噴灑站175〇的部 份概略,切開等角圖。在此一實施例之_觀點中,該流體 能自微電子工件114上剝除及蝕刻層。例如,氧化物,複 晶石夕,氮化物,金屬,蠢晶石夕,及其他材質能使用蝕技術 而被剝除。在其他實施例中,該噴灑站,例如,在經蚀刻 後,或在經其他處理階段之後,能完其他功能,比如清洗 ,漂洗,以及/或烘乾該微電子工件114。 在"^貫施例中,該喷灑站17 5 〇包括一容哭17 5 2及一 51 200306611 支架1760。該支架1760能包括一具有可移動地攜帶該微 電子工件114之支架指1763的轉子1762。該轉子1762能 被麵合至一^可在該容器17 5 2内將該微電子工件114自轉 之轉子1761。 在此一實施例之更進一觀點中,該容器1 752包括一具 有複數個主要喷灑嘴1771之喷灑嘴攔1770。在此一實施 例之一觀點中,該喷灑嘴欄1770能具有一含有複數個在 該十字的每一手臂上之主要喷灑嘴1771之十字外型安排 。其他實施例中,該喷灑嘴攔1 770能具有其他的安排。 在任何這些實施例,該喷灑嘴攔1 770能被耦合至一體入 口 1732以應流體至該主要喷灑嘴1771。因此,該主要喷 灑嘴1771可在當該微電子工件114自轉時,向上地引導 流體朝向該微電子工件114。一排水管1 744可收集用於自 該容器1752所移除之用過流體。 在此一實施例之另一觀點中,該容器1 752能更而包括 被定位在圍繞該容器1752周圍之側喷灑嘴1772。該側喷 灑嘴1772能被架構成可在經該主要喷灑嘴1771已被致動 ’例如,去漂洗蝕刻後該微電子工件114之後漂洗該微電 子工件114。該側喷灑嘴1772亦能被耦合至一氣體源,比 如,一惰性氣體源以弄乾漂洗後之微電子工件丨丨4。 熱處理站 圖1 8係根據本發明之實施例之用於熱處理微電子工件 114的一裝置1 800之部份概略側視圖。在此一實施例之一 觀點中’該裝置1800包括兩個熱處理室^03(被揭示有一 52 200306611 上部室1803a及一下部室1803b),其被裝置支架ι802所 支撐。每一室1803具有一被固定在該支架1802之底座 1 8 1 0及可移動朝向和遠離該底座1810以打開和關閉該室 1803之唇部1820。該工件114能被支撐在該室1803内之 複數個工件支架1 870上。在此一實施例之一觀點中,該 裝置1800能選火該工件114之一選定材質(比如銅或另一 金屬)。另一選擇方式地,該裝置1800能完成其他高溫度 處理,比如回流在該工件114上之焊鍚,硬化或烘烤該工 件114上之光阻,以及/或其他可從一高溫度獲利以及/ 或要求一高溫度之處理。該裝置1800亦能冷卻該工件n4 ,其如在下面之更詳細說明。 當該裝置1 800進行加熱及冷卻該工件114兩者時,該 支架1 870能首先在該處理之一加熱階段期間降低該工件 114進入接觸到一加熱源1840。接著,在該處理之一冷卻 階段期間,一第一加熱槽1 86〇能上升以接合該加熱源 1 840之一相對表面以冷卻該加熱源1 84〇及該工件114兩 者。在經該冷卻階段後,該第一加熱槽1860能降低以接 合一第二加熱槽185〇,其中該第一加熱槽I860被冷卻以 準備於另一週期。該唇部182〇能接著遠離該底座181〇並 且工件114被移除。在此一實施例之一觀點中,該加熱源 1840可以是一被定位在介於該工件114與該第一加熱槽 I860間之電阻薄膜或厚加熱器,且以該第一加熱槽 被定位在該加熱源184〇底下。該加熱源184〇包括被耦合 至工源(未示出)之真空孔口 1 84 1以當加熱時可拉該微電子 53 200306611 工件114進入緊密連接該加熱源184〇。例如,該加熱源 1840能以複數個加熱源支架1844而被支撐在相對於底座 1810,且該加熱源支架1844之至少一個包括與該真空孔 口 1 841流體連通之一真空通道。/ U The ionic membrane of the electronic workpiece 114, but still prevents or substantially prevents the auxiliary fluid from passing through towards the microelectronic workpiece 114. Instead, the auxiliary fluid can pass through the orifice 1474 and leave the inner container 1454 through the spiral drainage pipe 1440. Alternatively, the ion membrane can allow the fluid and ions to pass through. In one embodiment where the main and auxiliary flow systems are separated, the main fluid (which contacts the microelectronic workpiece 14) may be a catholyte and the auxiliary fluid (which does not contact the microelectronic worker # 114) It can be a separate anolyte. One advantage of this arrangement is that it eliminates the additive at the anode and therefore requires supplementation of the additive as is often required in a conventional installation. This feature, combined with the viewpoint of the container assembly 1452, the virtual anode, reduces the "strengthening experiment." The demand for the anode is typically a requirement to ensure a consistent black film on the anode to provide a predictable current. Instead, the current distribution is controlled by the architecture of the field shaping unit 1476. In other embodiments, the container assembly 1452 can have other rows. Refer to the further detailed view of the embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 14 and Another arrangement is included in International Application No. PCT / xjSOO / lOKO, which was filed on April 13, 2000 and incorporated herein by reference, and the following U.S. patent applications, all of which are incorporated herein For reference: No. 09/872, 15 1 of Shen Yan on May 31, 2001 (No. 29 195.8158 US for agent case) 'No. 09/80, 4, 96 of the application dated March 12, 2001 (agent Case No. 29195.81 19US); No. 09 / 804,697 filed on March 12, 2001 (No. 29195.8120US for Agent Case); No. 09/875 '3 65 (No. 29195.8156US); May 4, 2001 No. 09/849, 505 of Shen Zhen (Agent Case Case No. 29195.81 57US1); No. 09 / 866,391 filed on May 24, 2001 (Agent Case No. 29195.8157US2); No. 09/866, 463 filed on May 24, 2001 (Agent Case No. 29195 8157US3) ); And No. 10 / 008,636 of Shenyang on September 5, 2001 (agent case No. 29195.8 172US). The non-electric processing station Figure 15 is used for the construction of a frame according to one of the embodiments of the present invention. A schematic cross-sectional view of a portion of a processing station 1 550 without electricity. In one aspect of this embodiment, the processing station 1550 can include one of a supply valve assembly 1580a having a frame structure capable of holding 200306611 nasal teeth. The container assembly 1552 of the electroless processing fluid processing portion 1554. A fluid heater 1583 (shown generally in FIG. 15) may be coupled in fluid communication with the supply valve assembly 1580a to heat the inlet container assembly 1552. In one embodiment, the fluid is heated to a temperature of about 50 C to 80 C (eg, electroless nickel or copper can be electroplated) and in other embodiments, the fluid can be heated to the other Temperature. In another embodiment, the currentless body can The treatment portion 1554 includes a weir 559, and the processing fluid overflowing the weir 1559 is poured into a peripherally extending overflow channel 154. The overflow channel 1540 is passed through an overflow conduit 1538 and Coupled to a waste valve assembly 15 80b to remove processing fluid from the processing station 1550. In one aspect of this embodiment, the supply valve assembly 1550a includes three supply valves 1581 (two of which can be seen in FIG. 15) to supply three different phases in different stages of operation of the processing station 1 50 Handle fluids. A drain valve 1582 is positioned under the supply valve 1581 to discharge the supply valve assembly 1580a more completely. The waste valve assembly 1580b can have an arrangement substantially similar to one of the supply valve assembly 1580a to return the different treatment fluid to a suitable retention tank (not shown in an embodiment, the treatment station 1550 includes an exhaust Catheter 1537 'is positioned to remove gas waste products when a holder 1560 (the outline of which is shown in Figure 15) carrying the microelectronic workpiece 114 is contained within the container assembly 1552. Here In one aspect of an embodiment, the bracket 1560 can be substantially similar to the bracket 116 ′ described above with reference to FIG. N, but does not need to include a contact assembly 1170 (FIG. 11). Therefore, the bracket 48 200306611 1560 can support the micro The electronic workpiece 114 is in contact with the electroless treatment fluid in the container assembly 1552. In the operation member, a heated or unheated electroless treatment fluid can be guided to the processing portion 1 μ4 through the delta water supply valve assembly 1580a. An electroless, wet chemical deposition process can occur at the interface between the microelectronic workpiece 114 and the processing fluid in the processing section 1554 to deposit a conductive material on the microelectronic workpiece 114. The electroless location Can be used to place a variety of conductive materials on the microelectronic workpiece 114, such as seed layer reinforcement and / or repair materials, overlays, or other conductive structures. Another option is to use the station 1550 month b Material is removed from §Hai Microelectronics Workpiece 114. For example, the electroless processing station 1550 or a station having a substantially similar architecture can be used to etch the material from the backside of the wafer. In another device, one from The two-direction guided flow toward one of the microelectronic workpieces 114 can be used to remove material from the microelectronic workpiece 114, as described in detail below with reference to Fig. 16. Removal stations Figures 16A-B are based on this The material removal station 1 650 of the embodiment of the invention is partially explained. The material removal station 1650 or, the stripping unit, can be a sealed chamber for processing, which can complete cleaning and stripping. , Oblique etching, rinsing, and drying operations. In one aspect of this embodiment, the station worker can be used to remove the seed layer material from the front or component side of the microelectronic workpiece 114. Alternatively, The station 1650 can be used from the microelectronics Any of the front / components of the piece 114 or the conductive material and / or the non-conductive material is removed from any of the meniscus / non-component side of the microelectronic workpiece 114. In any of the 2003 200306611 embodiments, the enclosure includes Different fluid flows that are directed to the opposite side of the microelectronic workpiece 丨 14 to control the amount of material removed from the microelectronic workpiece 丨 14 First please refer to FIG. 16A. The station 1650 includes a drive shaft 1663 A bracket 166 of a motor coupled to a rotor 662. The rotor 1662 can include an upper chamber element 670 and a lower chamber element 680. The upper chamber element 1670 is separated from the lower chamber element 1680 (for example, by borrowing The support 1660 is moved upward to allow the microelectronic workpiece 114 to be positioned between the two. The upper chamber element 670 can include an upper chamber wall 1671 'which may define an upper chamber 1672 positioned adjacent an upper surface 1620 of the wafer 114. The lower chamber element 168o can include a lower chamber wall 1681 'which may define a lower chamber 1682 positioned adjacent a lower surface 1621 of the microelectronic workpiece 114. In operation, a first fluid (shown generally by arrow F1) is introduced into the station through an injection nozzle 1684 (such as a multi-port injection nozzle) 650 'through the lower chamber entrance MU and into the lower portion Room 丨 682. A second fluid (shown generally by arrow F2) is introduced into the upper chamber 1 672 through an upper chamber inlet 1673. Referring now to FIG. 16B, the first fluid F1 can advance outward along the lower surface 1621 of the microelectronic workpiece 114, but at this time, the second fluid ^ 2 radiates outward when the microelectronic workpiece 114 rotates Aiming at the upper surface 1620. In one aspect of this embodiment, the upper chamber element 1 670 here includes an exit tube positioned lightly inwardly away from the outer edge 1622 of the microelectronic workpiece 114. Therefore, the first stream 50 200306611 was able to merge with the second fluid and advance through the outlet tube 1675 then 'forward around the periphery of the outer edge ... side. In-another example = can be blocked or moved, so the first flow ... no: J: 5 the upper surface of the microelectronic workpiece 114 1620 ea, Λ ^ some application orders may need to be from the lower surface —The engraving material 'Jen still prevents the rest of the engraving, except that it occurs in the peripheral area 1623, but not on the upper surface. Therefore, the first fluid? Can be selected to include the agent 'and the second fluid F2 & includes an inert gas such as deionized water. The removal of the material f from this peripheral area 1623—the advantage is that it will reduce problems like film flakes and contamination that may occur during subsequent processing of the microelectronic workpiece 114. A more detailed view of m50 is described in the International Application No. PCT / US99 / 〇5676, which was filed on March 15, 1999 and is incorporated herein by reference. Spraying Station FIG. 17 is a schematic outline view of a part of a spraying station 1750 which sprays one or more more selected fluids onto a microelectronic workpiece m according to an embodiment of the present invention, and cuts out an isometric view. In one aspect of this embodiment, the fluid can strip and etch the layer from the microelectronic workpiece 114. For example, oxides, polycrystallites, nitrides, metals, stupid crystals, and other materials can be stripped using etch techniques. In other embodiments, the spraying station can perform other functions, such as cleaning, rinsing, and / or drying the microelectronic workpiece 114 after being etched, or after other processing stages. In the " ^ embodiment, the spraying station 17 5 0 includes a container 17 5 2 and a 51 200306611 support 1760. The bracket 1760 can include a rotor 1762 having a bracket finger 1763 that movably carries the microelectronic workpiece 114. The rotor 1762 can be faced to a rotor 1761 which can rotate the microelectronic workpiece 114 in the container 17 5 2. In a further aspect of this embodiment, the container 1 752 includes a spray nozzle stop 1770 having a plurality of main spray nozzles 1771. In one aspect of this embodiment, the spray nozzle bar 1770 can have a cross-shaped arrangement containing a plurality of main spray nozzles 1771 on each arm of the cross. In other embodiments, the spray nozzle holder 1 770 can have other arrangements. In any of these embodiments, the sprinkler nozzle 1 770 can be coupled to the integrated inlet 1732 to apply fluid to the main sprinkler nozzle 1771. Therefore, the main spray nozzle 1771 can guide the fluid upward toward the microelectronic workpiece 114 when the microelectronic workpiece 114 rotates. A drain pipe 1 744 can collect used fluid for removal from the container 1752. In another aspect of this embodiment, the container 1 752 can further include a side spray nozzle 1772 positioned around the periphery of the container 1752. The side spray nozzle 1772 can be framed so that the microelectronic workpiece 114 can be rinsed after the main spray nozzle 1771 has been actuated, for example, after the microelectronic workpiece 114 has been de-rinsed. The side spray nozzle 1772 can also be coupled to a gas source, for example, an inert gas source to dry the rinsed microelectronic workpiece. Heat Treatment Station FIG. 18 is a schematic side view of a portion of an apparatus 1 800 for heat treating a microelectronic workpiece 114 according to an embodiment of the present invention. In one aspect of this embodiment, the apparatus 1800 includes two heat treatment chambers ^ 03 (there are disclosed 52 200306611 upper chamber 1803a and lower chamber 1803b), which are supported by the apparatus bracket 802. Each chamber 1803 has a base 1 8 1 0 fixed to the bracket 1802 and movable toward and away from the base 1810 to open and close the lip 1820 of the chamber 1803. The workpiece 114 can be supported on a plurality of workpiece holders 1 870 in the chamber 1803. In one aspect of this embodiment, the device 1800 can fire a selected material (such as copper or another metal) of the workpiece 114. Alternatively, the device 1800 can perform other high-temperature treatments, such as reflow of solder on the workpiece 114, hardening or baking the photoresist on the workpiece 114, and / or other benefits from a high temperature And / or require a high temperature treatment. The device 1800 is also capable of cooling the workpiece n4, as explained in more detail below. When the device 1 800 heats and cools the workpiece 114, the support 1 870 can first lower the workpiece 114 into contact with a heating source 1840 during a heating phase of the process. Then, during a cooling phase of the process, a first heating tank 1 86 can rise to engage an opposing surface of the heating source 1 840 to cool both the heating source 1 84 and the workpiece 114. After the cooling stage, the first heating tank 1860 can be lowered to join a second heating tank 1850, wherein the first heating tank I860 is cooled to prepare for another cycle. The lip 1820 can then move away from the base 1810 and the workpiece 114 can be removed. In one aspect of this embodiment, the heating source 1840 may be a resistive film or thick heater positioned between the workpiece 114 and the first heating tank I860, and positioned with the first heating tank Under the heating source 1840. The heating source 184o includes a vacuum orifice 1 84 1 coupled to a working source (not shown) to pull the microelectronics 53 200306611 when heated. The workpiece 114 enters the tightly connected heating source 184o. For example, the heating source 1840 can be supported relative to the base 1810 with a plurality of heating source supports 1844, and at least one of the heating source supports 1844 includes a vacuum channel in fluid communication with the vacuum port 1 841.

每一室1803之該唇部1820能被耦合至一唇部致動器 以一打開位置(示在圖18中)向下移動至一關閉位置 。該上部t刪a之唇部致動胃1821被附著至該蓋子 1830,以及該下部室18〇3b之唇部致動器Μη被附著至 該上部室18G3a之該底座181〇。在—實施例中,每一唇部 致動器則能包括一環狀,空氣致動風箱,其當膨服時 可移動該唇部1820。當在風箱内之空氣壓力被釋放時,一 彈簧(未示出)能返回該唇部1820至打開(上部)位置。當該 唇部182G係在關閉位置時’該唇部182()與該底座 定義出-圍繞該微電子工件114之室容積18〇8。該唇部 1820包括—清洗流體料1822,其在進行處理時,可輸 送一清洗流體(比如氮氣)至該室容積丨8〇8。 該第一加熱槽i860可被耦合至一加熱槽致動器1861 ’且該加熱槽致動器騎可將該第—加熱槽刪向上移 動以接合該加熱源1840。在一實施例中,該加熱槽致動器 U61包括一大致類似於上述之該唇部致動器ΐ82ι之空氣 驅動風箱。另-選擇方式地’該加熱槽致動器顧能具 有其他可將該第-加熱# 186G向上移動以接合該加熱源 1840並且向了地移動遠離接合該加熱源、漏之架構。 在此一實施例之更進一觀點中,肖第一加熱槽_包 54 200306611 括一被連接至一真空源(未示出)之真空供應通路丨862。該 真空供應通路1862係被耦合至該第一加熱槽186〇之一上 部表面内之-或更多輻射真空通道以當該加熱源、圓及 該第一加熱槽I860要互連接時可將該第一加熱槽以⑼拉 入而與該加熱源1840緊密接觸。該第一加熱槽186〇之一 上部表面能包括一可壓縮,導熱墊以提供當該第一加熱槽 I860係在它的上升位置時可與該加熱源184〇緊密地熱接The lip 1820 of each chamber 1803 can be coupled to a lip actuator and moved down to an closed position in an open position (shown in FIG. 18). The upper lip-actuated stomach 1821 of the upper chamber is attached to the lid 1830, and the lip actuator Mn of the lower chamber 1803b is attached to the base 1810 of the upper chamber 18G3a. In an embodiment, each lip actuator can include a ring-shaped, air-actuated bellows that can move the lip 1820 when inflated. When the air pressure in the bellows is released, a spring (not shown) can return the lip 1820 to the open (upper) position. When the lip 182G is in the closed position ', the lip 182 () and the base define-a volume of the chamber 1810 surrounding the microelectronic workpiece 114. The lip 1820 includes a cleaning fluid material 1822, which can send a cleaning fluid (such as nitrogen) to the volume of the chamber during processing. The first heating tank i860 may be coupled to a heating tank actuator 1861 'and the heating tank actuator may move the first heating tank upward to engage the heating source 1840. In one embodiment, the heating tank actuator U61 includes an air-driven bellows substantially similar to the lip actuator ΐ82m described above. Alternatively, the heating tank actuator Gu Neng has other structures that can move the first heating # 186G upward to engage the heating source 1840 and move to the ground away from the structure that engages the heating source and drain. In a further point of view of this embodiment, the first heating tank _ package 54 200306611 includes a vacuum supply path 862 connected to a vacuum source (not shown). The vacuum supply path 1862 is coupled to one or more radiating vacuum channels in one of the upper surfaces of the first heating tank 1860 so that when the heating source, the circle, and the first heating tank I860 are to be connected to each other, The first heating tank is pulled in by ⑼ and comes into close contact with the heating source 1840. The upper surface of one of the first heating tanks 1860 can include a compressible, thermally conductive pad to provide a tight thermal connection with the heating source 1840 when the first heating tank I860 is in its raised position.

觸。在此實施例之另-觀點中,該第—加熱槽丨副之一 下部表面能包括-可壓、缩,導熱墊以提供與該第二加熱槽 1850緊密地熱接觸。 在-實施例中,該第—加熱槽186G不具有主動冷卻元 件。反而,該第二加熱槽185〇能主動地被冷卻並且在當 該第一加熱槽1860係與該加熱源1840斷接且與該第二加 熱槽1850接時,可冷卻該第一加熱槽186〇,因此,該第touch. In another aspect of this embodiment, the lower surface of the first heating tank can include a compressible, shrinkable, thermally conductive pad to provide intimate thermal contact with the second heating tank 1850. In the embodiment, the first heating tank 186G does not have an active cooling element. Instead, the second heating tank 1850 can be actively cooled and can cool the first heating tank 186 when the first heating tank 1860 is disconnected from the heating source 1840 and connected to the second heating tank 1850. 〇, therefore, the first

、加熱t 185G能包括_被_合至—冷卻流體供應琿及一 返回蟑(未示出)之冷卻通道1854。 μ在其他實_中,該裝置刪具有其他安排。例如 800包括一較簡單熱板裝置以用於處理溫度及 境需要如此精確控制的運用。在其他實施例中,該裝置 2韶熱源而不是電力施加的電阻加熱器。另一實施例之 汗細係被揭露在美國專利申請帛09/733,608(代理人案」 第29195.8U4US),其於2_年12月8日申明並在此< 入做為參考。 站組合及處理 55 200306611 參考圖1-8之以上所述之該裴置100能包括處理站之 各種組合,比如那些參考圖9-18之以上所述者,以完成 在該微電子工件114上之各種功能。在此一實施例之一觀 點中,邊裝置100能包括複數個站,其全部具有大致相同 架構且其全部大致可完成相同的功能。例如,該裝置100 能包括大致類似於參考圖16A_B之以上所述者的僅材質移 除站,或是大致類似於參考圖18之以上所述者的僅熱處 理站,或是大致類似於參考圖14之以上所述者的僅用於 金屬或電泳阻劑沈積之沈積站。 在其他實施例中,該裝置100能包括超過一型的站以The heating t 185G can include a cooling fluid supply and a cooling channel 1854 returning a cock (not shown). In other cases, the device has other arrangements. For example, the 800 includes a simpler hot plate device for applications where temperature and environment require such precise control. In other embodiments, the device is a heat source rather than a resistive heater with power applied. The sweat system of another embodiment is disclosed in U.S. Patent Application No. 09 / 733,608 (Nominee Case No. 29195.8U4US), which was declared on December 8th, 2012 and is incorporated herein by reference. Station combination and processing 55 200306611 The Pei 100 described above with reference to FIGS. 1-8 can include various combinations of processing stations, such as those described above with reference to FIGS. 9-18 to complete the microelectronic workpiece 114 Various functions. In one aspect of this embodiment, the edge device 100 can include a plurality of stations, all of which have substantially the same architecture and all of them can perform approximately the same functions. For example, the apparatus 100 can include a material-only removal station substantially similar to that described above with reference to FIG. 16A_B, or a heat-treatment only station substantially similar to that described above with reference to FIG. 18, or substantially similar to the reference drawing Deposition stations above 14 for metal or electrophoretic resist deposition only. In other embodiments, the device 100 can include more than one type of station to

完成在同一裝置100内之微電子工件114上之不同功能。 :如,在一實施例中,該裝i 1〇〇㊣包括一度量站,一相 質施加站’―材質移除站’一噴灑站,及一退火站。在其 他實施例中,該裝4 100 @包括這些型站的次組。例如:、 在一特定的實施例中,該裝i⑽㉟包括一大致類似於參Complete different functions on the microelectronic workpiece 114 in the same device 100. For example, in one embodiment, the device 1001 includes a metrology station, a material application station'-a material removal station ', a spray station, and an annealing station. In other embodiments, the equipment 4 100 @ includes a subgroup of these stations. For example :, In a specific embodiment, the device includes a

之以上所述者的多陽極材質施加站以用於電鍍焊 :至該微電子工件114上。該裝置亦包括-大致類似於參 圖17之以上所述者的噴灑站以當該微電子工件I"自 多陽極施加站出來後’可後處理職電子X件114。在此 -實施例之尚有一觀點中,該裝置能包括一預對準器,盆 被架構成可將那最料在—特定方向處理之微電子工件 114(比如具有—平坦邊緣之6忖或1M)麵晶圓)予以置向 。適預對準益之更詳細係、包括在美國專利第6,工, 498,其全部併入參考。 56 200306611 '、冑把例中’该裝置1 〇〇能包括站組合。例如, =更進一特定的實施例令,該…。…括參考圖 復該微電子工件114 Λ 於強化以及/或修 ,^ A 種子層。該裝置100能更包括 一大致類似於參考圖丨 之以上所述者的材質移除站, 一大致類似於參考圖14 价士 以7 之U上所述者的多陽極站以用於 細加一毯子材質至該微 千工件114,以及一大致類似於 參考圖18之以上所述者The above-mentioned multi-anode material application station is used for electroplating welding to the microelectronic workpiece 114. The device also includes a spraying station substantially similar to that described above with reference to FIG. 17 to process the electronic electronics 114 after the microelectronic workpiece I " comes out of the multi-anode application station. In one aspect of this embodiment, the device can include a pre-aligner, and the quilt frame constitutes a microelectronic workpiece 114 (such as a 6 忖 or 1M) wafer). A more detailed description of suitable pre-alignment benefits is included in US Patent No. 6, 498, which is incorporated by reference in its entirety. 56 200306611 'In the example, the device 100 can include a station combination. For example, = to go to a specific embodiment, this ... ... including the reference figure. The microelectronic workpiece 114 is used to strengthen and / or repair the seed layer. The device 100 can further include a material removal station substantially similar to the one described above with reference to FIG. 丨, and a multi-anode station substantially similar to the one described above with reference to FIG. A blanket material to the micro-workpiece 114, and a substantially similar to that described above with reference to FIG. 18

微電子工件m之該覆蓋層:,站以退火该被施加至該 卢理更進而實施例中,該裝置100能被架構成可 處理在5亥放電子工件1】4 μ 上之電泳阻劑。例如,該裝置 100此包括一類似於參考圖 ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 4之以上所述者的多陽極站以 用於沈積该電泳阻劑,以及一 。在此-實施例之一觀點中 後處理該電泳阻劑 於夫考二1 烘烤室能具有-大致類似 於參考圖18之以上所述者的架構,以及在—另 ,該烘烤室係較為簡單且罝古絲心,从 ^ rThe cover layer of the microelectronic workpiece m: stands to anneal and is applied to the Luli further embodiment, the device 100 can be framed to form an electrophoretic resist that can be processed on the electronic workpiece 1] 4 μ . For example, the apparatus 100 includes a multi-anode station similar to that described above with reference to FIG. ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 4 for depositing the electrophoretic resist, and one. In one aspect of this example, the post-treatment of the electrophoretic resist Yufu Kao 2 baking room can have a structure substantially similar to that described above with reference to FIG. 18, and in addition, the baking room system Simpler and more ancient heart, from ^ r

一 具有類似於-熱平板之構造,以 提咼该微電子工件114之严庚5本从 艾/皿度至大約U2t。該裝 能更包括一大致類似於參考圖17 以用於更進一步之後處理。 上所述者的喷麗站 在任何前述之實施例中’微電子工件可以 或一手動模式中被自動地 甘丄秒進入以及/或遠離該處理站, 其如參考1-5之以上所述。就 ^ 之以上所沭 二’:些微電子工# 114 .能被自動地移進入以及/或遠離 該選定處理站,但此時其他 ^ 尾子工件114能被自動移 57 200306611 進入處理站。另一選擇方式地,該裝i _能以另一方式 致力於手動操作及自動操作。在任何這些實施例中,該裝 置100能提供一用於一測試,實驗,或展示處理,及在二 生產設定中之不同處理的多樣平台。 傳送裝置 、用於處理微電子工件之傳送裝置的操作及特點是在知 道该能被使用之環境及設備下最能被理解。因為如此,該 傳送裝置能被使用中之處理裝置的一些實施例將參考圖^ 而予以祂㉛j專送裝置之一些實施例的細節及特點將接著 參考圖20A-26而予以描述。 用於自動工件傳送裝置之微電子工件處理I置之選 實施例One has a structure similar to that of a hot plate to enhance the accuracy of the microelectronic workpiece 114 from 5 to about 2 Ut. The device can further include a reference similar to FIG. 17 for further processing. The spray station of the above mentioned in any of the foregoing embodiments, 'the microelectronic workpiece may be automatically entered and / or away from the processing station in a leap second in a manual mode, as described above with reference to 1-5 . ^ Above two: Some microelectronic workers # 114 can be automatically moved into and / or away from the selected processing station, but at this time, other tail workpiece 114 can be automatically moved 57 200306611 into the processing station. Alternatively, the device can be dedicated to manual operation and automatic operation in another way. In any of these embodiments, the device 100 can provide a variety of platforms for one test, experiment, or demonstration process, and different processes in two production settings. The operation and characteristics of the conveying device and the conveying device for processing microelectronic workpieces are best understood by knowing the environment and equipment that can be used. Because of this, some embodiments of the processing device in which the transfer device can be used will be described with reference to FIG. ^, And details and features of some embodiments of the special delivery device will be described with reference to FIGS. 20A-26. Selection of Microelectronic Workpiece Handling Device for Automatic Workpiece Conveying Device

圖19係係根據本發明之實施例之一具有一工件處理* 置1930之處理裝置1900的等角圖,且該處理裝置 係用於操作複數個微電子工件19〇1。在一些實施例中,^ 致類似於在此所述者之工件處理裝置係被併入其他處理身 置’比如參考卜8之以上所述的裝置1〇〇。被揭示在擇 Μ中之該處理裝i测的—部份係以—切開視圖來& 以解說選定的内部零件。在此一實施例之一觀點中,% 理裝置蘭能包括一具有一可定義一外殼之内部區19〇 之櫃1902,且該外係至少部份地與一外部區19〇5相隔离 。該櫃1902亦包括複數個孔口 19〇6,且該工件ΐ9〇ι藉$ 過該孔口 1906在介於該内部區19〇4與一裝入/卸下多 1910間進入及出去。 58 200306611 該裝入/卸下站1910能具有兩容器支架1912,且其 每一係被容納在一保護遮蔽物1913内。該容器支架1912 係被架構可將工件容器1914定位在相對於在該櫃19〇2内 之孔口 1906。該工件容器1914能每一容納複數個微電子 工件1 90 1在’’迷你’’清潔環境中以用於攜帶複數個微電子工 件穿過那不符清潔室標準之其他環境。每一工件容器1 914 係牙過该孔口 1906而接取到該櫃19〇2内之該内部區19〇4 〇 ”亥處理裝置1900亦能包括在該櫃i 9〇2内之該内部區 1904中之複數個處理站192〇及一傳送裝置193〇。該處理 裝置,例如,可以是一電鍍工具,以及該處理站1920能 為一用於電鍍,無電電鍍,退火,清洗,蝕刻,以及或度 量分析之單一晶圓室。用於使用在該處理裝置1900中之 合適處理站1920係被揭露在美國專利號第ό,228,232 及6,080,691,及在在美國申請專利號第〇9/385, 784;09/386 ^ 803; 09/386 ^ 610; 09/386 ^ 197; 09/501 . 〇〇2; 09/733 ’ 608; 09/804,696; A 09/804,697,以上全部以 其整體性被併人參考。該處理站192G並不受限於電鑛裝 置,並且因此該處理裝置19〇〇能為其他型工具。例如, 一實施例中,該處理站聰係被架構成可施加一光阻材 質至該微電子工件1 901。 該傳送裝置1930在介於該工件容器1914與該處理站 1920間移動微電子卫件·。該傳送裝置193()係包括一 線f生執道1 932 ’其係沿著在該處理站j 92〇間之内部區 59 200306611 的長度方向上延伸。在一圖19中所揭示之特定實施 例中,一第一組處理站1920係被安排成沿著一第一列Ri_ R〗及一第二組處理站192〇係被安排成沿著一第二列R2_i 。該線性轨道1932在介於該處 理站1920之第一列與第二 歹J間之伸。忒傳送裝置193〇更包括一被該執道攜帶 之#自動機态單元1934。就如在下面更詳細說明,該線性傳 迗裝置1930與該處理站192〇裝置之組合可提供一良好微 電子工件1產速率並且消除介於被該自動機器單元1934 攜帶之工件間的碰撞。 用於在處理機器中處理微電子工件之傳送裝置的實例 圖20A係更詳細解說該自動機器單元i934之一實施 例。該自動機器單元1934包括一輸送單元2〇1〇,一被該 輸送單元2010攜帶之手臂組件2〇3〇,及被該手臂組= 2〇3〇攜帶之第一及第二終端控制器2〇5〇(其各別以參考號 2050a及2050b所識別)。該輸送單元2〇1〇能包括一具有 複數個附著至一内部框(在目2〇A “出)之板的遮蔽物或 罩2012。該罩2012之一頂部板内的一開口 2〇14係容納該 手臂組件2030之一部份。吾人應重視到該輸送單元2〇⑺ 及該罩2012係依照該自動機器單元1934被使用之特定實 施例而具有許多不同架構。該輸送單元2〇1〇,例如,可以 是一固定式’旋轉式’或是以—非線性移動之底座。該輸 送單元2010亦能包括一被架構成可側向地沿著該執道 1932移動之導引兀件。被揭示在圖2〇a之該輸送單元 2〇1〇的特定實施例包括被一底座板2〇16所定義之導力2 60 200306611 件’且該底座板2016滑動地將該自動機器單元1934耦合 至5亥執道1932。該自動機器單元1934能因此沿著該執道 1932平移(箭頭τ)以定位該自動機器單元1934鄰近於一 所需之處理站1920(圖19)。 該手臂組件2030能包括一被耦合至一升降組件(在圖 2〇A未示出)之腰元件2032。該手臂組件2030亦能包括一 具有一中段2035之手臂2034,一自該中段2035之一側凸 出之第一延伸2036a,及一自該中段2035之另一側凸出之 第二延伸2036b。該手臂2034之第一及第二延伸2036a及 2036b能被如揭示在圖2〇a中所示相互正好相反地對放, 或它們能以一所需角度相互延伸。在一實施例中,該第一 及第二延伸2036a及2036b係相互整合一起,但在另一實 施例中,該第一及第二延伸2036a及2〇36b可以是相互固 定住之各別零件。在尚有另一實施例中,該手臂2034能 包括一單一延伸,其如在參考圖20B,25及26之更詳細 描述。 該手臂組件2030能沿著一升降路徑l-L移動以改變 該手臂2034之高度來將該終端控制器2〇5〇定位在一所需 之咼度。該升降路徑L-L大致地橫向延伸至該執道1932, 且在此所使用之延伸係括傾斜或垂直安排。該手臂組件 2030亦能繞著該升降路徑L-L旋轉(箭頭Ri)以定位該第一 延伸2036a之一末梢端203 8a以及/或第二延伸2〇36b之 一末梢端2038b鄰近於一所需的工件容器1914或處理站 1920。遠弟一及第一延伸2036a-b大致如一單一單元繞兮 61 200306611 升降路徑L-L旋轉,此乃因它們是整合一體或相互固定住 。在此一實例中,該第一及第二延伸2036a-b之運動係因 此相互依賴。在另一實例中,該手臂2034能具有那未被 固定住且相互獨立地動之延伸。用於沿著該升降路徑l_l 移動該手臂組件2030之選定實施例及用於繞著該升降路 徑L-L旋轉該手臂2034之其他組件係在參考圖22及23 之以下更洋細描述中。 該終端控制器2050被該手臂2034旋轉地攜帶。在一 實施例中,該第一終端控制器2050a係旋轉地耗合至該第 一末梢端203 8a以繞著一第一旋轉軸ArAi(箭頭r2)旋轉。 該第二終端控制器2050b係旋轉地耦合至該第二末梢端 203 8b以繞著一第二旋轉轴八2-八2(箭頭R3)旋轉。該第一及 第一旋轉軸及A2_A2能大致平行於該升降路徑, 但在另一實施例中,這些軸橫向延伸至升降路徑l_l。該 第一及第二終端控制器2050a和2050b能每一包括一用於 固持該工件1901至該終端控制器205〇之工件固持器2〇52 。被揭示在圖20A之該工件固持器2052為真空吸盤,其 可使用吸力固持該工件1901至該終端控制器2〇5〇。工件 固持器2052之另一實施例包括邊緣夾住終端控制器,比 如那些揭露在已被併入為參考之前述專利申請案中。如參 考圖21A-21C之更詳細描述中,(a)繞著該升降路徑 旋轉之手臂,(b)繞著一第一旋轉軸A。、旋轉之第一終 端控制器2050a,(c)繞著一第二旋轉軸a”、旋轉之第二 終端控制器2050b等之旋轉運動係被協調,所以該第一及 62 200306611 第二終端控制器2050a和2050b能每一被定位成鄰近任一 工件容器1914及鄰近在該櫃19G2(圖19)之任—側上之處 =站。該第一終端控制器2〇5〇a能隔開遠離該手臂2〇34一 第-距離Di ’及該第二終端控制器2〇通能隔開遠離該手 臂2034 -第二距離d2。被揭示在圖2〇a之實施例中,該 距離D,係乂於„亥距離化以使得該第—終端控制器 係比起該第二終端控制器2_為不同高度。該第一終端 控制器2050a因此當其繞著該第一旋轉轴^义旋轉時可 $穿過-第-平面’並且該第二終端控制器2g當其繞 著該第二旋轉軸入2_\旋轉時可動穿過一第二平面。該第 -及第二平面係大致平行且固定地相互隔開以使得該終端 控制器2050“口 2050b不相互干擾。然而,該第一及第二 平面能有其他安排(即非平面),只要它們並不在—位於該 手臂顧上方之區相干擾。該第—及第二終端控制器 2050a和2050b能使用隔離物或其他型装置而被固定在相 對於該手f 2034之特定高度。例如,㈣―終㈣❹ 2〇50a能藉由-第—隔離物2()54a而與該手臂2州相隔開 ’以及該第二終端控制11 2嶋能藉由-第二隔離物 2〇54b相隔開。該第一及第二隔離物2〇54a_b能具有不同 厚度以從該手f 2034⑮開該終端控制胃2㈣在一所需之 距離。 該第一及第二終端控制器2〇5〇a_b及該手臂“Μ能具 有較被揭示在圖20A中架構不同之架構。例如,如被揭示 在圖20B中,該手臂則能具有僅—自該腰元件2〇32凸 63 200306611 出之單一延伸2036且該終端控制器2〇5〇a_b兩者可被該,, 單一延伸,,所攜帶以使得該第一及第二終端控制器2〇5〇a_b 被固定在相對於該手f 2G34之不同高度。該終端控制器 2〇5〇a_b,例如,能被耦合至該手臂之端2038並且繞著一 共同旋轉軸A_A旋轉。具有單—延伸之另—手臂之更詳細 係在參考圖25及26之以下說明。 圖21A-21C係解說處理站192〇之一裝置及操作該傳 裝置1930之更詳細數個架構。該處理站192〇包括任何組 合或單一晶圓單元之單一型,其包括(a)清洗/蝕刻室 1920a,比如被該Semit〇〇1公司製造之capsuleTM ;⑻無 電電鍍室1920b;(c)電鍍室192〇c;(d)快速退火(RTA)室 192(M ; (e)度量站(未被揭示在圖21A中);以及/或其他 型之單一晶圓處理站。在被揭示在圖2丨A中之特定實施例 中,處理站1920之第一列&係包括複數個鄰近於該裝入 /卸下站1910之清洗/蝕刻室192〇a,一在該清洗/蝕刻 室192〇a下游之無電電鍍室192〇b,及複數個在該無電電 鍍室1920b下游之電鍍室1920c。除了 一 RTA室192()係 位在該裝入/卸下站1910之輸出側及在介於該清洗/蝕 刻密封室1920a與電鍍室1920c間不存在有一無電室以外 ’此一特定實施例之處理站192〇之第二列&具有一類似 裝置。 解說在圖21A中之處理站的安排係僅代表該處理站 1920如何能被安排在該櫃1 902内之一例子。在另一實施 例中’ 一度量站能替換一更多其他處理站,該處理站相對 64 200306611 ; 凌入/卸下站丨9丨〇之位置能被改變,以及/或其他 型處理站能被使用以使得解說在圖21A中之-些處理站可 =不被包括在該處理裝f 内。例如,該清洗/钱刻 山封至1920a與電鍍室192()c之位置能被交換,或另一電 鍍至1920c此替換該無電電鍍室192〇b及rta室。 圖21A解說在經一第一工件19〇u已被裝入在該第一 終端控制器2050a上之後操作該傳送裝置193〇之一架構。 該第終鳊控制器2〇50a之操作可以類似於該第二終端控 制器2050b之操作。並且因而了簡化之目的,僅該第二終 鳊抆制态2050b之運動被描述如下。該自動機器單元1934 能移動該手臂組件2030(圖2〇A),所以該第二終端控制器 2〇50b能從一工件容器1914拾取一第二工件i9〇ib。為做 此一動作,該自動機器單元1934定位該第一工件19〇1在 位於泫升降路徑L-L上方之一輸送位置,並接著該手臂 、'且件2030(圖20A)垂直地移動直到該第二終端控制器 2〇50b係在一所需高以可通過第二工件i9〇ib之底下。該 手臂組件2030接著繞著該升降路徑L_L(圖2〇A)旋轉該第 一延伸203 6b,以及/或第二終端控制器2〇5〇b繞著第二 方疋轉軸A^A2(圖20A)旋轉直到該第二終端控制器2〇5〇b係 位在邊第二工件1901b之底下。當一真空係被排氣穿過該 工件固持器2052(圖20A)以穩固固持該第二工件19〇113至 忒第二終端控制器2050b時,該手臂組件2〇3〇能接著被 提高。該自動機器單元1934能接著藉由該自動機器單元 H34沿著該執道1932運動,第二延伸2〇3讣繞著該升降 65 200306611 路徑L-L之旋轉以及/或第二終端控制器205〇b繞著第二 旋轉軸Α^Α2之旋轉的組合而從該工件容器19丨4抽出—第 二工件1901b。在該工件容器1914内之剩下工件在後續處 理中能藉由更調整該工件容器1914以及/或該手臂組件 203 0(圖20A)中之一者之高度而以類似方式被裝入該終端 控制器2050之上,或是這些工件能藉由相反此一程序而 被卸下進入其他工件容器1914内。一般而言,移動該手 臂組件至正確高度係比移動該該工件容器更為需要,此乃 因此消除了每次確指引全部工件之需求。在經拾取該工件 1901後,該傳送裝置1930能裝入或卸下在任一處理站 1920内被該自動機器單元1934以該第一列R!或第二列R 攜帶之工件1901。 穿過處理站1920之工件流係根據該處理裝置ι9〇〇之 特定應用及使用來改變。在一實施例中,該傳送裝置丨93〇 能限制終端控制器之一者以僅處理清潔工件且其他終端控 制器僅處理髒工件。該清潔終端控制器能被用來處理工件 容器内之工件且自該清洗/蝕刻室1920a移除該工件。該 髒終端控制器能被用來自電鍍室1920b及1920c移除工件 且接著輸入該工件進入該清洗/蝕刻室1 920a。 用於電鍍銅或其他材質至該第二工件19〇lb上之一處 理流係牽涉將該第二工件1901b放入不是在(a)如果該種子 層需要被強化,則為無電電鍍室1920b就在(b)電鑛室 1920c之一者。在經該工件19〇ib被電鍍後,該傳送裝置 1930從相對應之電鍍室i92〇c抽出該工件19〇11>並且典型 66 200306611 地將其放入一清洗/蝕刻室192〇a。該第二工件i9〇ib能 接著從該清洗/蝕刻室192〇a抽出並被放入用於完工工件 之其他工件容器1914(“out-wiP,,)内。應重視到此一處理流 係可能理流之僅一例子,且穿過處理站之工件的運動係根 據該處理裝置之特定架構及被完成在工件上之處理而定。 例如,該工件1901b在清洗/蝕刻室192〇a後及被放入 out-WIP”之前,可被傳送至該快速退火室192〇(J。 圖21B解說操作該傳送裝置193〇之另一架構,其中 該工件1901 a-b係被定位可沿著該軌道1932移動。該第二 工件1901b係藉由將該第一終端控制器2〇5〇a繞著第一旋 轉軸旋轉及將該第二終端控制器205〇b繞著該第二 旋轉軸ΑγΑ2旋轉直到兩終端控制器係在該手臂上方而重 疊在該第一工件19〇la上方。該手臂2〇34亦繞著該升降路 徑L-L旋轉,所以該手臂2〇34及該第一及第二延伸 2〇36a-b係大致地以沿著該執道1932之方向延伸。該自動 機器單元1934能接著在處理站間沿著該軌道1932平移。 被揭示在圖21B中之架構係對於3〇〇mm晶圓特別有 用以減少該處理裝置1900之全部寬度。將被每一處理裝 置所佔樓板空間的面積最小化係需要的,但許多用於容納 300mm晶圓之設計則趨向於比使用2〇〇mm晶圓所佔面積 更大,此乃13該處理站及介於處理站間之面積必須能容納 較大晶圓。藉工件間之相互重疊地來沿著該軌道1932輸 送,則用於輸送工件在處理站之列間的開放面積減少至一 大約為單-工件之直徑。此外,同一架構能被用於處理 67 200306611 2〇〇mm晶圓以使得被3〇〇mm晶圓所佔據之樓板空間的面 積,如果有的話,不會大量地多於一 2〇〇mm晶圓工具。在 經該工件1901a-b係被重疊以用於沿著該軌道1932移動之 後,該自動機器單元1934能沿著該軌道移動至一所需處 理站且該手臂組件2〇3〇能沿著該升降路徑垂直地移 動以定位該工件在所需高度處。 圖21C係解說操作該傳送裝置1930之另一架構,其 中該自動機器單元1934係正裝該第二工件19〇ib'進入電 鍍室1920c之一者。該自動機器單元1934沿著該軌道 1932滑動直到該手臂2〇34(圖21B)之第二延伸2〇3讣係鄰 近所需之電鑛站192〇卜該手臂My接著繞該升降路徑卜 L旋轉且該第二終端控制器2〇5〇b繞著該第二旋轉軸八2_ A2旋轉直到該第二工件1901,係被定位在該電鍍站說 之一倒轉頭上方。該自動機器單& 1934能因此定位每一 終端控制器2050a及2050b在該櫃19〇2之所需側上及在一 所需高度處,所以該終端控制器2〇5〇a及2〇5〇b能以該第 一列R,或第二列&來接取任何處理站192〇。該 1請因此可提供一具有一單一手臂及雙終端控制器,、:可 :壬何工件容器1914以及,或在該櫃19〇2内之處理站 該傳送裝置1930之數個實施例係被預期可防止與該工 件1901之碰撞而沒有複雜軟體演算或複雜機械系統'^工 傳送裝置1930之這些實施例的一觀點是它們具有僅二, 一手臂及被耦合至該手臂之終端控制器, 單 昂一終端控 68 200306611FIG. 19 is an isometric view of a processing device 1900 having a workpiece processing * 1930 according to one embodiment of the present invention, and the processing device is used to operate a plurality of microelectronic workpieces 901. In some embodiments, workpiece processing devices similar to those described herein are incorporated into other processing locations, such as the device 100 described above with reference to FIG. 8. The part of the process that was revealed in the selection is cut-away view & to illustrate the selected internal parts. In one aspect of this embodiment, the controller can include a cabinet 1902 with an internal area 1910 that defines a housing, and the exterior is at least partially isolated from an external area 1905. The cabinet 1902 also includes a plurality of orifices 1906, and the workpiece ΐ900 is borrowed through the orifice 1906 to enter and exit between the inner area 1904 and a loading / unloading unit 1910. 58 200306611 The loading / unloading station 1910 can have two container holders 1912, each of which is housed in a protective cover 1913. The container holder 1912 is structured to position the workpiece container 1914 relative to the opening 1906 in the cabinet 19202. The workpiece containers 1914 can each accommodate a plurality of microelectronic workpieces 1 90 1 in a 'mini' clean environment for carrying a plurality of microelectronic workpieces through other environments that do not meet the standards of a clean room. Each workpiece container 1 914 is toothed through the opening 1906 to access the inner area 1904 of the cabinet 1902. The processing device 1900 can also be included in the interior of the cabinet 920 A plurality of processing stations 1920 and a transfer device 1930 in zone 1904. The processing device, for example, can be a plating tool, and the processing station 1920 can be used for electroplating, electroless plating, annealing, cleaning, etching, And / or single wafer chamber for metrology analysis. A suitable processing station 1920 for use in the processing device 1900 is disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 228,232 and 6,080,691, and is patented in the U.S. No. 09/385, 784; 09/386 ^ 803; 09/386 ^ 610; 09/386 ^ 197; 09/501. 〇〇2; 09/733 '608; 09/804, 696; A 09 / 804,697, all of which are incorporated by reference for their integrity. The processing station 192G is not limited to electrical mining equipment, and therefore the processing equipment 1900 can be other types of tools. For example, in one embodiment, the The processing station Satoshi is framed to apply a photoresist material to the microelectronic workpiece 1 901. The transfer device 1930 is between the Mobile microelectronics guard between the container 1914 and the processing station 1920. The conveying device 193 () includes a line f shengdao 1 932 ', which is along the inner area 59 200306611 between the processing station j 920 It extends in the length direction. In a specific embodiment disclosed in FIG. 19, a first group of processing stations 1920 is arranged along a first column Ri_R and a second group of processing stations 1920 is arranged. Along a second column R2_i. The linear orbit 1932 extends between the first column and the second column of the processing station 1920. The transfer device 1930 further includes a #automaton carried by the execution channel. State unit 1934. As explained in more detail below, the combination of the linear transmission device 1930 and the processing station 1920 device can provide a good microelectronic workpiece production rate and eliminate workpieces that are carried by the automatic machine unit 1934. An example of a conveying device for processing microelectronic workpieces in a processing machine. Fig. 20A illustrates an embodiment of the automatic machine unit i934 in more detail. The automatic machine unit 1934 includes a conveying unit 2010, a Carried by the transport unit 2010 The arm assembly 2030, and the first and second terminal controllers 2050 carried by the arm group = 2030 (each of which is identified by reference numbers 2050a and 2050b). The conveying unit 2 〇10 can include a shield or cover 2012 having a plurality of plates attached to an inner frame ("out of the head 20A"). An opening 2014 in a top plate of the cover 2012 is to receive a part of the arm assembly 2030. I should note that the conveying unit 20 单元 and the cover 2012 have many different architectures according to the specific embodiment in which the automatic machine unit 1934 is used. The conveying unit 2010 may be, for example, a fixed 'rotary type' or a non-linearly moving base. The transmission unit 2010 can also include a guide member which is constructed to be movable laterally along the execution path 1932. A specific embodiment of the transport unit 2010 disclosed in FIG. 20a includes a guiding force 2 60 200306611 defined by a base plate 2016 and the base plate 2016 slides the automatic machine unit 1934 Coupling to 1932, 5th Avenue. The robotic unit 1934 can therefore be translated (arrow τ) along the lane 1932 to locate the robotic unit 1934 adjacent to a desired processing station 1920 (Figure 19). The arm assembly 2030 can include a waist element 2032 coupled to a lifting assembly (not shown in FIG. 20A). The arm assembly 2030 can also include an arm 2034 having a middle section 2035, a first extension 2036a protruding from one side of the middle section 2035, and a second extension 2036b protruding from the other side of the middle section 2035. The first and second extensions 2036a and 2036b of the arm 2034 can be placed opposite each other as shown in FIG. 20a, or they can extend to each other at a desired angle. In one embodiment, the first and second extensions 2036a and 2036b are integrated with each other, but in another embodiment, the first and second extensions 2036a and 2036b may be separate parts fixed to each other. . In yet another embodiment, the arm 2034 can include a single extension, as described in more detail with reference to Figures 20B, 25, and 26. The arm assembly 2030 can be moved along a lifting path l-L to change the height of the arm 2034 to position the terminal controller 2050 at a desired degree. The lifting path L-L extends approximately laterally to the holding road 1932, and the extension used herein includes an inclined or vertical arrangement. The arm assembly 2030 can also rotate (arrow Ri) around the lifting path LL to locate a distal end 2038a of the first extension 2036a and / or a distal end 2038b of the second extension 2036b adjacent to a desired Workpiece container 1914 or processing station 1920. The first brother and the first extension 2036a-b are roughly like a single unit. 61 200306611 The lifting path L-L rotates because they are integrated or fixed to each other. In this example, the movements of the first and second extensions 2036a-b are therefore interdependent. In another example, the arms 2034 can have extensions that are not fixed and move independently of each other. Selected embodiments for moving the arm assembly 2030 along the lifting path l_l and other components for rotating the arm 2034 about the lifting path L-L are described in more detail below with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The terminal controller 2050 is rotatably carried by the arm 2034. In one embodiment, the first terminal controller 2050a is rotatably coupled to the first tip end 2038a to rotate about a first rotation axis ArAi (arrow r2). The second terminal controller 2050b is rotatably coupled to the second distal end 203 8b to rotate about a second rotation axis VIII-2-8 (arrow R3). The first and first rotation axes and A2_A2 can be substantially parallel to the lifting path, but in another embodiment, the axes extend laterally to the lifting path l_l. The first and second terminal controllers 2050a and 2050b can each include a workpiece holder 2052 for holding the workpiece 1901 to the terminal controller 2050. The workpiece holder 2052 disclosed in FIG. 20A is a vacuum chuck, which can hold the workpiece 1901 to the terminal controller 2005 using suction. Another embodiment of the workpiece holder 2052 includes an edge clamp terminal controller, such as those disclosed in the aforementioned patent application, which has been incorporated by reference. As described in more detail with reference to Figs. 21A-21C, (a) an arm rotating around the lifting path, and (b) around a first rotation axis A. The rotating motion of the first terminal controller 2050a, (c) around a second rotation axis a ", the rotating second terminal controller 2050b, etc. are coordinated, so the first and 62 200306611 second terminal controls 2050a and 2050b can each be positioned adjacent to any workpiece container 1914 and adjacent to any one of the cabinets 19G2 (Figure 19)-side = station. The first terminal controller 2050a can be separated 2034-the first-distance Di 'away from the arm and the second terminal controller 20 can be separated from the arm 2034-the second distance d2. As shown in the embodiment of FIG. 20a, the distance D This is because the distance between the first terminal controller is different from that of the second terminal controller 2_. The first terminal controller 2050a can therefore pass through the -th-plane when it rotates around the first rotation axis, and the second terminal controller 2g enters 2_ \ when it rotates around the second rotation axis. It can move through a second plane when rotating. The first and second planes are substantially parallel and fixedly spaced apart from each other so that the terminal controller 2050 'port 2050b does not interfere with each other. However, the first and second planes can have other arrangements (ie, non-planar), as long as They do not interfere in the area above the arm. The first and second terminal controllers 2050a and 2050b can be fixed at a specific height relative to the hand f 2034 using spacers or other types of devices. For example, ㈣―terminal㈣❹ 2050a can be separated from the arm 2 state by the first spacer 2 () 54a 'and the second terminal control 11 2 嶋 can be separated by the second spacer 2054b The first and second spacers 2054a_b can have different thicknesses to open the terminal to control the stomach 2⑮ from the hand f 2034 at a desired distance. The first and second terminal controllers 2050a_b and The arm "M can have a different architecture than that disclosed in Fig. 20A. For example, as shown in FIG. 20B, the arm can have only a single extension 2036 from the waist element 2032 convex 63 200306611 and both the terminal controller 2050a_b can be, Extend, carry so that the first and second terminal controllers 2050a_b are fixed at different heights relative to the hand f 2G34. The terminal controller 2050a_b, for example, can be coupled to the end 2038 of the arm and rotate about a common rotation axis A_A. Having a single-extended other-more detail of the arm is described below with reference to Figs. 21A-21C illustrate one of the devices of processing station 1920 and several more detailed architectures for operating the transmitting device 1930. The processing station 1920 includes a single type of any combination or single wafer unit, which includes (a) a cleaning / etching chamber 1920a, such as CapsuleTM manufactured by the company Semit001; ⑻ an electroless plating chamber 1920b; (c) plating Chamber 192c; (d) Rapid Annealing (RTA) chamber 192 (M; (e) metrology station (not disclosed in FIG. 21A); and / or other types of single wafer processing station. 2 丨 A In a specific embodiment, the first row of the processing station 1920 & includes a plurality of cleaning / etching chambers 192a adjacent to the loading / unloading station 1910, one in the cleaning / etching chamber 192 〇a downstream electroless plating room 1920b, and a plurality of electroplating rooms 1920c downstream of the electroless plating room 1920b. Except for an RTA room 192 () is located on the output side of the loading / unloading station 1910 and in the medium Between the cleaning / etching and sealing chamber 1920a and the plating chamber 1920c, there is no non-electrical chamber. The second row of the processing station 1920 of this particular embodiment & has a similar device. The processing station in FIG. 21A is illustrated Arrangement is only one example of how the processing station 1920 can be arranged in the cabinet 1 902. In the other In the embodiment, 'a measuring station can replace one more other processing station, the processing station relative to 64 200306611; the position of the insertion / unloading station 丨 9 丨 〇 can be changed, and / or other types of processing stations can be used to Some processing stations illustrated in FIG. 21A may not be included in the processing equipment f. For example, the position of the cleaning / money seal to 1920a and the plating room 192 () c can be exchanged, or another Plating to 1920c This replaces the electroless plating chamber 1920b and rta chamber. Figure 21A illustrates one of the transfer devices 1930 after the first workpiece 19u has been loaded on the first terminal controller 2050a. The operation of the second terminal controller 2050a can be similar to the operation of the second terminal controller 2050b. Therefore, for the purpose of simplification, only the movement of the second terminal mode 2050b is described below. The The robot unit 1934 can move the arm assembly 2030 (Fig. 20A), so the second terminal controller 2050b can pick up a second workpiece i9oib from a workpiece container 1914. To do this, the automatic The machine unit 1934 locates the first work piece 201 One of the conveying positions above the path LL, and then the arm, the workpiece 2030 (FIG. 20A) moves vertically until the second terminal controller 2050b is tied at a required height to pass the second workpiece i9〇ib. Bottom. The arm assembly 2030 then rotates the first extension 2036b around the lifting path L_L (Fig. 20A), and / or the second terminal controller 2050b around the second square rotation axis A ^ A2 (Fig. 20A) Rotate until the second terminal controller 2050b is positioned under the second work piece 1901b. When a vacuum system is evacuated through the workpiece holder 2052 (Fig. 20A) to hold the second workpiece 190113 to the second terminal controller 2050b firmly, the arm assembly 2030 can then be raised. The automatic machine unit 1934 can then move along the execution path 1932 by the automatic machine unit H34, and the second extension 203 is rotated around the lift 65 200306611 path LL and / or the second terminal controller 2050b A combination of rotations about the second rotation axis A ^ A2 is withdrawn from the workpiece container 191-4-the second workpiece 1901b. The remaining workpieces in the workpiece container 1914 can be loaded into the terminal in a similar manner by further adjusting the height of one of the workpiece container 1914 and / or the arm assembly 2030 (Figure 20A). On the controller 2050, or these workpieces can be unloaded into other workpiece containers 1914 through the reverse process. In general, moving the arm assembly to the correct height is more necessary than moving the workpiece container, which eliminates the need to guide all the workpieces at a time. After picking up the workpieces 1901, the conveyor 1930 can load or unload the workpieces 1901 that are carried by the robotic unit 1934 in the first row R! Or the second row R in any processing station 1920. The workpiece flow through the processing station 1920 is changed according to the specific application and use of the processing device 9000. In one embodiment, the transfer device 93 can limit one of the terminal controllers to process only clean workpieces and the other terminal controllers to process only dirty workpieces. The cleaning terminal controller can be used to process a workpiece in a workpiece container and remove the workpiece from the cleaning / etching chamber 1920a. The dirty terminal controller can be used to remove workpieces from the plating chambers 1920b and 1920c and then enter the workpieces into the cleaning / etching chamber 1 920a. A process flow for electroplating copper or other materials onto one of the second workpieces of 190 lbs involves placing the second workpiece 1901b not in (a) if the seed layer needs to be strengthened, the electroless plating chamber 1920b is One of (b) 1920c electric mines. After the workpiece 19oib is plated, the transfer device 1930 extracts the workpiece 1911 from the corresponding plating chamber i92oc and typically puts it into a cleaning / etching chamber 1920a. The second workpiece i9oib can then be withdrawn from the cleaning / etching chamber 1920a and placed into other workpiece containers 1914 ("out-wiP,") for finished workpieces. It should be noted that this processing flow system There is only one example of possible flow, and the movement of the workpiece through the processing station is based on the specific structure of the processing device and the processing completed on the workpiece. For example, the workpiece 1901b is in the cleaning / etching chamber 1920a Before being placed in the out-WIP ", it can be transferred to the rapid annealing chamber 1920 (J. Fig. 21B illustrates another structure for operating the transfer device 1930, wherein the workpiece 1901 ab is positioned to move along the track 1932. The second workpiece 1901b is formed by rotating the first terminal controller 20050a around the first rotation axis and rotating the second terminal controller 2050b around the second rotation axis AγΑ2. Until the two terminal controllers are tied above the arm and overlapped above the first workpiece 19a. The arm 2034 also rotates around the lifting path LL, so the arm 2034 and the first and second extensions 2036a-b extends approximately along the direction 1932 The robotic unit 1934 can then be translated along the track 1932 between processing stations. The architecture disclosed in Figure 21B is particularly useful for 300mm wafers to reduce the overall width of the processing device 1900. It will be The minimum floor space occupied by the processing device is required, but many designs for 300mm wafers tend to be larger than the area occupied by 200mm wafers. The area between the processing stations must be able to accommodate larger wafers. By overlapping the workpieces to transport along this track 1932, the open area for transporting the workpieces between the processing station rows is reduced to a large about single-workpiece In addition, the same architecture can be used to process 67 200306611 200mm wafers so that the area of floor space occupied by 300mm wafers, if any, will not be much larger than one 2 〇〇mm wafer tool. After the workpieces 1901a-b are overlapped for moving along the track 1932, the automatic machine unit 1934 can move along the track to a required processing station and the arm assembly 2 〇3〇 Can go along The lifting path moves vertically to position the workpiece at a desired height. Fig. 21C illustrates another structure for operating the transfer device 1930, wherein the automatic machine unit 1934 is loading the second workpiece 19ob 'into the plating room 1920c. The automatic machine unit 1934 slides along the track 1932 until the second extension 203 of the arm 2034 (Figure 21B) is adjacent to the required power station 1920. The arm My then goes around the The lifting path B1 is rotated and the second terminal controller 2500b is rotated around the second rotation axis 8 2_ A2 until the second workpiece 1901 is positioned above one of the inversion heads of the plating station. The automatic machine sheet & 1934 can therefore position each terminal controller 2050a and 2050b on the required side of the cabinet 1902 and at a desired height, so the terminal controllers 2050a and 2〇 50b can pick up any processing station 1920 with the first column R, or the second column &. The 1 request can therefore provide a single-arm and dual-terminal controller, which can be: any workpiece container 1914 and, or a processing station in the cabinet 19202, several embodiments of the transfer device 1930 are It is anticipated that collisions with the workpiece 1901 without complex software calculations or complex mechanical systems are one aspect of these embodiments of the mechanical transfer device 1930 in that they have only two, one arm, and a terminal controller coupled to the arm, Single Ang Terminal Control 68 200306611

制器操作在-第-平面且該第二終端控制器係操作在一不 會與該第-平面在該手臂上方相交之第二平面。第一及第 二終端控制器能被可旋轉間隔物來機械相互隔開以操作在 不同平面,且該可旋轉間隔物可自該手臂分別地分隔第一 及f二終端控制器為第-及第二距離,而不論該手臂本身 之高度。該終端控制器係如此安排以使得它們可相對於該 手臂自由地旋轉,但該工件不能相互碰撞。因此,該且有 -被耦合至終端控制器之#手臂之傳送裝^ 193〇之實施 例係被預期可減少工件間之碰撞。 因為終端控制器具有一很大運動自由度,故該傳送裝 置1930之數個實施例亦是多樣化且被用在許多不同工具 中^亥傳送裝置193G之-實施例的—觀點是該手臂能⑷ 沿著-執道平移穿過該機器⑻沿著一升降路徑橫向地移動 以改變該終端控制H之高度⑷繞升降路徑旋轉。如此允許 該手臂能定位該終端控制器在該工具内之複數個位置及高 度所以5亥玉具㉟具有被—I一工具所服務之處理站的數The controller is operated on the -th plane and the second terminal controller is operated on a second plane that does not intersect the first plane above the arm. The first and second terminal controllers can be mechanically separated from each other by rotatable spacers to operate in different planes, and the rotatable spacers can separate the first and f second terminal controllers from the arm as the first and second, respectively. The second distance, regardless of the height of the arm itself. The terminal controllers are arranged so that they can rotate freely with respect to the arm, but the workpieces cannot collide with each other. Therefore, this embodiment, which has a #arm transfer device coupled to the terminal controller 193, is expected to reduce collisions between workpieces. Because the terminal controller has a large degree of freedom of movement, several embodiments of the transmission device 1930 are also diversified and used in many different tools. HI transmission device 193G-of the embodiment-the point is that the arm can Translate along the road through the machine, move laterally along a lifting path to change the height of the terminal control H, and rotate around the lifting path. This allows the arm to locate the multiple positions and heights of the terminal controller within the tool. Therefore, the number of processing stations served by a tool

種:同型及安排。另一觀點是該終端控制器能被置放在該 手臂之相對端,且它們能單獨地該手臂旋轉。如此允許每 終碥控制器來服務在該工具内之任何處理站。因此,該 傳送裝置1930之數個實施例可提供具有在一單一自動機 裔早70内兩獨立操作之終端控制器而沒有如被要求用於含 兩各別自動機器單元之複雜機械零件及軟體。 該傳送裝置1930之許多實施例亦提供一完工晶圓之高 生產量。被使用來製造微電子元件之一機器的生產量係典 69 200306611Species: isotypes and arrangements. Another aspect is that the terminal controllers can be placed on opposite ends of the arm, and they can rotate the arm individually. This allows each terminal controller to serve any processing station within the tool. Therefore, several embodiments of the transfer device 1930 can provide a terminal controller with two independent operations within a single automatic machine as early as 70 without the need for complex mechanical parts and software including two separate automatic machine units . Many embodiments of the transfer device 1930 also provide high throughput of a finished wafer. Production volume of one of the machines used to make microelectronic components 69 200306611

型以被處理穿過機器之w/hr/ft2來量測。提供一高生產量 之一觀點疋该線性軌道可允許數處理站被以一列列地安排 ’且該列係被一單一自動機器所服務。處理站及該該線性 執道之線性安排係比起使用一旋轉自動機器系統可大量地 減少用於每一處理站之所需樓板空間。甚而,藉以一重疊 安排來沿該執道傳送該工件,該介於處理站間之距離能被 減少為大約一單一晶圓直徑。這在3〇〇mm應用中係特別有 用,此乃因沿一執道且側接側地攜帶這些工件將要求該處 理工具之足印上之一很大增加量。 提供一高生產量之另一觀點是該單一手臂,雙終端控 制器之自動機器能快速地取得全部,或至少大部份之在該 工具内之處理站,此乃因(a)其並不需要具有那將緩慢處理 時間之複雜避免碰撞演算,以及(]3)其能使用一用於一高操 作速率之高速馬達。維修一快速,多樣自動機器單元及可Models are measured at w / hr / ft2 processed through the machine. To provide a high throughput perspective, the linear orbit allows the number of processing stations to be arranged in rows and rows that are served by a single automated machine. The processing station and the linear arrangement of the linear path can greatly reduce the floor space required for each processing station compared to the use of a rotating automatic machine system. Even with an overlapping arrangement to transport the workpiece along the lane, the distance between the processing stations can be reduced to approximately a single wafer diameter. This is particularly useful in 300mm applications, as carrying these parts side by side and side by side would require a significant increase in the footprint of the processing tool. Another view that provides a high throughput is that the single-arm, dual-terminal controller automatic machine can quickly get all, or at least most of the processing stations in the tool, because (a) it does not require With a complex collision avoidance algorithm that will slow processing time, and () 3) it can use a high speed motor for a high operating rate. Quick maintenance, multiple automatic machine units and

提供一有效足印的安排之組合能因此可提供用於該處理裝 置100之數實施例之一高生產量(w/hr/ft2)。 、 圖22解說該自動機器單元1934之更詳細的一實施例 。在此一特定實施例中,該輸送單元2010及該手臂組件 2030能操作如一類似於參考圖ΐ9·2ι〇:以上所述之方式, 並且因而類似參考號碼係代表在目19_22之類似元件。該 自動機器單it 1934包括_具有—升降致動器2212,一升 降兀件2214 ’及-被輕合至該升降元件2214之升降平台 2216之升降組件2210。該升降致動器2212可以是伺服馬 達,-線性致動器,或另一可提供旋轉或線性運動之精確 70 * 200306611 控制之合適裝置。在被揭示在圖22之實施例中,該升降 致動器2212可以是具有一驅動軸2218之伺服馬達,且該 一驅動輪2219係被附著至該驅動軸221 8。在此一實施例 中之該升降元件2214係一具有被穩固固著至一被動輪 2220之球螺旋或一引螺旋。該升降組件2210亦包括一導 引,比如一導引軌2214a。從該升降致動器2212的輸出係 藉由一圍繞該驅動輪2219之皮帶2222及該被動輪2220 而被耦合至該被動輪2220。該升降組件2210能更包括一 螺帽2224,且該螺帽2224係穿線地耦合至該引螺旋升降 元件2214及被固定地麵合至該升降平台2216。 該升降組件2210係藉由施電力至該升降致動器22 i 2 以旋轉該驅動輪2219並產生該引螺旋升降元件2214之對 應旋轉來操作以提高/降低該升降平台2216。該螺帽 2224根據該升降元件2214之旋轉垂直地移動以提高/降 低該升降平台2216來用於調整該第一及第二終端控制器 205 0a及205 0b之高度。應重視到該螺帽2224之衝程長度 可定義該手臂組件2030之升降運動的程度。此外,當^ 螺帽2224被定位在該升降元件2214之下部端處時,該升 降致動器2212係被容納在該升降平台2216内之一空腔 222^6。因為該升降致動器2212能被直接地定位在該二二 平台2216底下,故該空腔22%可允許該自動機器單元 1934之尺寸較為緊密及該升降衝程之長度較大。 應重視到升降組件之其他實施例能被用來提高及降 該手臂組件2030。例如,嗲并胳分杜处 " J °亥升降70件能為一被一伺服馬達 71 200306611 驅動之剪刀升降組件,或該升降致動器22丨2之驅動軸能 為該引螺旋升降元件2214以消除圖22之實施例的輪及皮 帶0The combination of arrangements that provide an effective footprint can thus provide a high throughput (w / hr / ft2) for one of the several embodiments of the processing device 100. Fig. 22 illustrates a more detailed embodiment of the automatic machine unit 1934. In this particular embodiment, the conveying unit 2010 and the arm assembly 2030 can be operated in a manner similar to that described with reference to Figure 9.2: above, and thus similar reference numbers represent similar elements in heading 19-22. The automatic machine sheet it 1934 includes a lifter 2212, a lifter 2214 ', and a lifter assembly 2210 that is lightly closed to a lifter platform 2216 of the lifter 2214. The lifting actuator 2212 can be a servo motor, a linear actuator, or another suitable device that can provide precise 70 * 200306611 control of rotary or linear motion. In the embodiment disclosed in FIG. 22, the lifting actuator 2212 may be a servo motor having a driving shaft 2218, and the driving wheel 2219 is attached to the driving shaft 2218. The lifting element 2214 in this embodiment has a ball spiral or a lead spiral which is firmly fixed to a passive wheel 2220. The lifting assembly 2210 also includes a guide, such as a guide rail 2214a. The output from the lifting actuator 2212 is coupled to the driven wheel 2220 via a belt 2222 and the driven wheel 2220 surrounding the driving wheel 2219. The lifting assembly 2210 can further include a nut 2224, and the nut 2224 is threadedly coupled to the lead screw lifting element 2214 and fixed to the lifting platform 2216. The lifting assembly 2210 is operated by applying power to the lifting actuator 22 i 2 to rotate the driving wheel 2219 and generate corresponding rotation of the lead screw lifting element 2214 to raise / lower the lifting platform 2216. The nut 2224 moves vertically according to the rotation of the lifting element 2214 to raise / lower the lifting platform 2216 for adjusting the heights of the first and second terminal controllers 205 0a and 205 0b. It should be noted that the stroke length of the nut 2224 can define the degree of the lifting movement of the arm assembly 2030. In addition, when the nut 2224 is positioned at the lower end of the lifting element 2214, the lifting actuator 2212 is received in a cavity 222 ^ 6 in the lifting platform 2216. Because the lifting actuator 2212 can be positioned directly under the two or two platform 2216, the cavity 22% allows the size of the automatic machine unit 1934 to be tighter and the length of the lifting stroke to be larger. It should be noted that other embodiments of the lifting assembly can be used to raise and lower the arm assembly 2030. For example, 70 pieces of J & H lifting can be a scissors lifting assembly driven by a servo motor 71 200306611, or the driving shaft of the lifting actuator 22 丨 2 can be the lead screw lifting element 2214 to eliminate the wheel and belt of the embodiment of FIG.

該手臂組件2030係被該升降組件221()所攜帶以沿著 該升降路徑L-L運動。在被圖22所揭示之實施例中,該 手臂組件2030包括一被該升降平台2216所攜帶之底座 2230及一被該底座2230所攜帶之腰馬達2232。該腰元件 2032係藉由一軸襯2237而被耦合至該腰馬達2232之一輸 出軸2236。該腰馬達2232係被固定地附著至該軸襯2237 以使得該軸襯2237之轉動可旋轉該腰元件2〇32。一介於 該軸襯2237與該邊緣2238間之軸承224〇可允許該腰馬 達2232旋轉該軸襯2237及經由該驅動軸2237之輸出而 旋轉該腰元件2032。The arm assembly 2030 is carried by the lifting assembly 221 () to move along the lifting path L-L. In the embodiment disclosed in FIG. 22, the arm assembly 2030 includes a base 2230 carried by the lifting platform 2216 and a waist motor 2232 carried by the base 2230. The waist element 2032 is coupled to an output shaft 2236 of the waist motor 2232 through a bushing 2237. The waist motor 2232 is fixedly attached to the bushing 2237 so that the rotation of the bushing 2237 can rotate the waist element 2032. A bearing 224 between the bushing 2237 and the edge 2238 allows the waist motor 2232 to rotate the bushing 2237 and rotate the waist member 2032 via the output of the drive shaft 2237.

該手臂組件2030能更包括一第一控制器驅動2242&及 一被攜帶在該腰元件咖之—空腔加内之第二控制器 驅動助b。該第-控制器驅動22仏具有一被搞合至一 驅動輪之輸出軸’且該驅動輪係藉一皮帶22—而被耦名 至一被動輪2245a。該第二控制器驅動可藉由一海 似安排而操作地被耗合至該第二終端控制器2〇5〇b。該第 二控制器驅動2242b,例如,能具有一與一驅動輪22441 相連接之輸出轴’且該驅動輪2244b係藉一皮帶22働而 被搞合至-被動輪2245a。在圖22所揭示之實施例中,筹 一及第二控制器驅動2242a* 2242b為—伺服馬達。該号 臂組件2030之另一實祐办丨山 *中,然而,能使用被容納該号 72 200306611 #内之線f生致動态或其他型致動器以操作該終端控制器 205 0a及2050b。例如,該控制器驅動2242能為一具有含 有螺桿齒輪與之輸出軸之伺服馬達,且該被動㉟2245可 被以該螺桿齒輪相喷合之齒輪來替換。該螺桿齒輪之轉動 將因此旋轉該終端控繞著該轉動軸。 '亥手臂組件2030之操作係藉(a)旋轉該腰元件2032及 該手臂2034繞著該升降路徑L-L,及(…分別地單獨旋轉 忒第一及第二終端控制器2〇5〇a及2〇5〇b繞著第一及第二 方疋轉軸Α,-Α!及Α^Α2旋轉。該腰馬達2232旋轉該腰元件 2032及5亥手臂2034繞著該升降路徑l-L以定位該手臂 2034之第一及第二延伸2〇36a及2〇3讣在一相對於該工件 谷器1920(圖19)以及/或該處理站192〇(圖19)之所需位置 。4第一控制器驅動2242a旋轉第一終端控制器繞 著第一旋轉軸Α^Α,並且該第二控制器驅動2242b旋轉第 二終端控制器2050b繞著第二旋轉軸a2-A2。該控制器驅 動2242a-b係相互獨立地操作及操作該腰馬達2232,所以 該終端控制器2050a及2050b能與該手臂2034以一複合動 作來運動。此一運動能因而大致地沿著任何所需路徑來平 移e亥工件1901。因此,該腰馬達2232及控制器驅動2242a 及2242b能並行地或串聯地操作以提供該終端控制器2〇5〇 之所需運動。 3亥自動機器單元1934亦包括複數個放大器以操作被該 自動機益單元1934攜帶之馬達。在此一實施例中,該放 大器能包括四個伺服放大器2250(其被參考號225〇心d所辨 73 200306611 識)°亥放大态2250操作該升降致動器2212,該腰馬達 2232,及控制器驅動2242a_b。此外,該輸送單元By包 括用於一軌道馬達(未示出)之伺服放大器2252,且該軌 道馬達沿著该執道1932移動該輸送單元2〇1〇(圖19)。該 放大器2250及2252係由一被該輸送單元2〇1〇所攜帶之 扰制電路板(圖22中未示出)所控制以使得許多用於該自動 機器單元1934之電線及電子電路係局部地以該輸送單元 2〇1〇所攜帶。用於該腰馬達2232及控制器驅動2242a_b 之一些内部電線係被攜帶在一與該升降平台22丨6垂直移 動之可聲曲電纜軌道2254内。如此減少穿過該處理裝置 1900之長電線的數目。 圖23揭示在一工件位置中之第一及第二終端控制器 2050a及205 0b。在此一架構中,該第一間隔物2〇54a與 第一終端控制器2050a分隔·為該第一距離Di及該第二間 隔物2054b與1該手臂2034分隔為該第二距離D2。該該 第一及第二終端控制器2050a及2050b係在該手臂2034上 方時’第一工件19〇la能被疊在該第二工件19〇lb之下方 以用於沿著該軌道1932輸送,其如參考圖21B以上所述 者。應重視到該第一及第二終端控制器2〇5〇a及2〇5〇b能 與該手臂2034藉由不同的距離及使用不同的技術相分隔 。被揭示在圖23中之特實施例係使用固定的間隔物2〇5乜 及2054b以提供一在介於該第一及第二終端控制器2〇5〇a 及2〇50b的高度上之固定差異,如此減少一用於複雜避免 碰撞演异的需求,此乃因該第一及第二工件1 901 a-b係本 74 200306611 來就被固持在它們不能相互碰撞或與該自控制單元1 934 之零件相碰撞之兩度。 圖24係更詳細解說該第二終端控制器2050b與該手臂 2034之第二延伸2036b之連接。在此一實施例中,該輪 2245b係被固定地附著至該間隔物2054b以及該終端控制 器2050b之鄰近端係被固定地附著至該間隔物2054b。該 皮帶2246b因而旋轉該輪2245b繞著第二旋轉軸A2-A2。 該輪2245b係藉由一軸承而被安裝至一旋轉流體穿管2300 。該流體穿管2300包括一通路2304,且一真空能排氣或 一被施壓流體能被排氣過該通路2304。該通路2304係與 在該間隔物2054b流體連通的並穿過終端控制器2050b而 與一通路2038流體連通以使得該流體能穿過該第二終端 控制器2050b。在此一真空終端控制器之情況下,一真空 被排氣穿過該通路2304,2306,及2308以產生在該工件 固持器2052(圖20A)之吸力。一介於該流體穿管2300與該 間隔物2054b間之密封2310防止這兩零件之漏氣。應重 視到應用一真空或驅動一施壓後流體穿過一終端控制器之 另一實施例何使用其他構來完成。此外,該終端控制器可 以是如揭示之真空終端控制器或它們可以為邊緣夾住終端 控制器,其可使用施壓後流體以驅動工線性活塞以固持該 工件的邊緣頂靠凸出片(請視國際專利申請號第 09/386, 566;09/386,590;09/386,568 ;其全部在此此倫併入做參 考。 該傳送裝置1 930之實施例係被預期可具有高可靠度。 200306611 4傳送裝置1 930比起具有在一單面積内之複數個單獨自 動機益單元的傳送裝置而言係減少零件的數目及操作軟體 之複雜度。一般而言,減少一系統的複雜度之裝置係更可 靠及更易於維修,此乃因它們需要較少零件。因此,該傳 送裝置1930之實施例係被預期可具有低維修要件及低的 因零件故障所造成之當機時間。 圖25係據本發明之實施例之一具有一含有一單一延伸 2536之手臂2534的輸送單元251〇之等角圖。在此一實施 例之一觀點中,該輸送單元251〇包括一被一線性軌道 1932(圖20A)所支撐之自動控制單元2535以如箭頭τ所示 之線性移動。因此,該自動控制單元2535被自動地移進 入與裝入/卸下站1910(圖19)及任何處理站192〇(圖19)相 對準。該自動控制單元2535包括一底座2537,其支撐一 用於向上及向下沿著該升降路徑L-L,其被箭頭v指示且 如在參考圖20A以上所述者,移動之腰元件2532。該腰元 件2532支撐具有一手臂2534之手臂組件253〇,且該手臂 2534本對於底座2537旋轉,其如箭頭所示。在此一實 施例中,該手臂2534具有一單一,離心延伸2536,其自 λ升降路技L-L凸出且支撐兩終端控制器225〇(揭示有第 一終端控制器2〇5〇a及第二終端控制器2〇5〇b)。該終端控 制器2250相互獨立相對該手臂2534繞著一共同軸旋轉^ 如箭頭R2所示。 在此一實施例之一觀點中]亥自動控制單元2535以— 可彎曲電纜2542(比如一帶電纜)被耦合至一控制單元 76 200306611 2541(概略揭不在圖25)。該自動控制單元2535能因此如 前頭τ線性移動而沒有自電纜2542之限制。在此一實施 · 例之更進一觀點中,該被要求操作該該自動控制單元2535 , 本身之控制及電力之重要部份能被定位在該控制單元2541 内而不是在該自動控制單元2535上。此一安排之優點是 忒自動控制單το 2535可被做成更小且因此需要較少移動 空間。 圖26係根據本發明實施例之該自動控制單元2535之 部份概略剖視圖。在此一實施例之一觀點中,該第一終端 控制器2550a係被支撐在一内部軸2545a上且第二終蠄控 制器2550b係被一被放置遠離該内部軸254九之外部軸 2545b上。該外部軸2545b係被一外部軸皮帶254仍(圖% 之平面的外延伸)所驅動,且該外部軸皮帶接著被一外部軸 輪(被定位成離開圖26之平面)所驅動。該内部軸2545&被 耦合至一内部軸皮帶2544a,其接著被一内部軸輪 予動力因為δ亥第一終端控制器2550a係垂直地離開第 鲁 一終端控制器2550b,每一終端控制器255〇能移動而沒有 興其他者的運相干擾。藉由提供單獨電力傳送至每一端控 制器2550,每一端控制器255〇能與他者運動地移動。 —多考圖20B ’ 25 & 26之以上所述該自動控制單元的 一實施例之一特點是該單一,離心延伸2536在當該手臂 疋轉時’較不像多凸出安排之與周邊零件相干擾。相 反,,具有多延伸之-優點{它們有效地增加該自動控 制單元之接取程度。因此,特^型之手臂安排能被基於, 77 200306611 例如,該處理站1920及裝入/卸下站1910之特定安排來 加以選定。在一特定實施例中,一具有一單一延伸2536 之自動控制單元2535可適用於一具有一單一列處理站之 工具,比如參考圖1 -8以上所述。 由以上之說明可知,本發明之特定實施例已在此為解 說目的而予以說明,但在未脫離本發明之精神及範疇前提 下,仍可有各種不同之修改n不可因之而限制本發 明之範疇,本發明係由申請專利範圍所界定。 【圖式簡單說明】 圖1係根據本發明之一實施例之一被架構成可手動愈 自動兩者處理微電子工件的裝置之部份剖視等角圖。 圖2係根據本發明之一實施例之一具有一被置放成可 手動地接收微電子工件的支架之大致類似於圖丨的裝置之 部份示意剖面側視圖。The arm assembly 2030 can further include a first controller driver 2242 & and a second controller driver b which is carried in the waist element cavity-cavity. The first controller drive 22 'has an output shaft' coupled to a drive wheel, and the drive train is coupled to a driven wheel 2245a by a belt 22-. The second controller driver can be operatively consumed to the second terminal controller 2050b by a similar arrangement. The second controller driving 2242b can, for example, have an output shaft 'connected to a driving wheel 22441 and the driving wheel 2244b is coupled to a passive wheel 2245a by a belt 22 働. In the embodiment disclosed in FIG. 22, the first and second controller drives 2242a * 2242b are-servo motors. The other part of the horn assembly 2030 is in the mountains. However, it is possible to use a dynamic or other type of actuator that accommodates the number 72 200306611 # to operate the terminal controller 205 0a and 2050b. For example, the controller drive 2242 can be a servo motor with a screw gear and its output shaft, and the passive ㉟2245 can be replaced by a gear that is sprayed with the screw gear. The rotation of the screw gear will therefore rotate the terminal control around the rotation axis. The operation of the Hai arm assembly 2030 is by (a) rotating the waist element 2032 and the arm 2034 around the lifting path LL, and (... respectively rotating the first and second terminal controllers 2050a and 2050b rotates around the first and second square rotation axes A, -Α! And A ^ Α2. The waist motor 2232 rotates the waist element 2032 and the arm 2034 around the lifting path lL to position the arm The first and second extensions 2036a and 203 of 2034 are at a desired position relative to the work piece maker 1920 (Fig. 19) and / or the processing station 1920 (Fig. 19). 4First control The driver 2242a rotates the first terminal controller around the first rotation axis A ^ A, and the second controller drives 2242b to rotate the second terminal controller 2050b around the second rotation axis a2-A2. The controller drives 2242a- b is to operate and operate the waist motor 2232 independently of each other, so the terminal controllers 2050a and 2050b can move with the arm 2034 in a compound motion. This movement can thus translate ehai roughly along any desired path Workpiece 1901. Therefore, the waist motor 2232 and the controller drives 2242a and 2242b can be operated in parallel or in series. Operate to provide the required motion of the terminal controller 2500. The 30A automatic machine unit 1934 also includes a plurality of amplifiers to operate the motor carried by the automatic machine unit 1934. In this embodiment, the amplifier can Includes four servo amplifiers 2250 (identified by reference number 225 ° d 73200306611). The magnified state 2250 operates the lifting actuator 2212, the waist motor 2232, and the controller drive 2242a_b. In addition, the conveying unit By includes a servo amplifier 2252 for an orbital motor (not shown), and the orbital motor moves the conveying unit 2010 (FIG. 19) along the lane 1932. The amplifiers 2250 and 2252 are provided by a The disturbance circuit board (not shown in FIG. 22) carried by the conveying unit 2010 is controlled so that many electric wires and electronic circuits for the automatic machine unit 1934 are partially used by the conveying unit 2010. Carry. Some internal wires for the waist motor 2232 and controller drive 2242a_b are carried in a vocal cable track 2254 that moves vertically with the lifting platform 22 丨 6. This reduces the number of passes through the processing device 1900 Number of long wires. Figure 23 reveals the first and second terminal controllers 2050a and 2050b in a workpiece position. In this architecture, the first spacer 2054a is separated from the first terminal controller 2050a. Is the first distance Di and the second spacer 2054b and 1 the arm 2034 is separated into the second distance D2. When the first and second terminal controllers 2050a and 2050b are above the arm 2034, the first workpiece 190a can be stacked below the second workpiece 190b for transport along the track 1932, as described above with reference to FIG. 21B. It should be noted that the first and second terminal controllers 2050a and 2500b can be separated from the arm 2034 by different distances and using different technologies. The particular embodiment disclosed in FIG. 23 uses fixed spacers 2050a and 2054b to provide a distance between the first and second terminal controllers 2500a and 2050b. Fixed differences, thus reducing the need for a complex collision avoidance variant, because the first and second workpieces 1 901 ab are originally 74 200306611 and are held in such a way that they cannot collide with each other or with the self-control unit 1 934 The parts collide twice. FIG. 24 illustrates the connection between the second terminal controller 2050b and the second extension 2036b of the arm 2034 in more detail. In this embodiment, the wheel 2245b is fixedly attached to the spacer 2054b and the adjacent end of the terminal controller 2050b is fixedly attached to the spacer 2054b. The belt 2246b thus rotates the wheel 2245b about the second rotation axis A2-A2. The wheel 2245b is mounted to a rotating fluid passage tube 2300 through a bearing. The fluid passage tube 2300 includes a passage 2304, and a vacuum energy can be exhausted or a pressurized fluid can be exhausted through the passage 2304. The passage 2304 is in fluid communication with the spacer 2054b and passes through the terminal controller 2050b and is in fluid communication with a passage 2038 so that the fluid can pass through the second terminal controller 2050b. In the case of this vacuum terminal controller, a vacuum is exhausted through the passages 2304, 2306, and 2308 to generate a suction force on the workpiece holder 2052 (Fig. 20A). A seal 2310 between the fluid passage tube 2300 and the spacer 2054b prevents air leakage between the two parts. Attention should be paid to the application of another embodiment of applying a vacuum or driving a pressured fluid through a terminal controller using other constructions. In addition, the terminal controllers can be vacuum terminal controllers as disclosed or they can clamp terminal controllers for edges, which can use a fluid under pressure to drive a linear piston to hold the edge of the workpiece against the tab ( See International Patent Application Nos. 09/386, 566; 09/386, 590; 09/386, 568; all of which are incorporated herein by reference. Embodiments of the transfer device 1 930 are expected to have high Reliability. 200306611 4 Conveying device 1 930 reduces the number of parts and the complexity of operating software compared to conveying devices with a plurality of separate automatic mechanical units in a single area. Generally speaking, reducing a system's Complex devices are more reliable and easier to maintain because they require fewer parts. Therefore, the embodiment of the conveyor 1930 is expected to have low maintenance requirements and low downtime due to component failure Figure 25 is an isometric view of a transport unit 2510 having a single arm 2534 extending 2536 according to one embodiment of the present invention. In one aspect of this embodiment, the transport unit 2510 Includes an automatic control unit 2535 supported by a linear track 1932 (Figure 20A) in a linear movement as shown by arrow τ. Therefore, the automatic control unit 2535 is automatically moved into the loading and unloading station 1910 (Figure 19) and any processing station 1920 (Fig. 19). The automatic control unit 2535 includes a base 2537 that supports a upward and downward movement along the lifting path LL, which is indicated by the arrow v and as referenced 20A above, a moving waist element 2532. The waist element 2532 supports an arm assembly 2530 having an arm 2534, and the arm 2534 is rotated with respect to the base 2537 as shown by the arrow. In this embodiment The arm 2534 has a single, centrifugal extension 2536, which protrudes from the λ lifter LL and supports two terminal controllers 225 (the first terminal controller 2005a and the second terminal controller 2 are revealed). 5〇b). The terminal controllers 2250 are independent of each other and rotate around a common axis with respect to the arm 2534 as shown by arrow R2. In one aspect of this embodiment] Hai automatic control unit 2535 with-flexible cable 2542 (Such as a cable) is coupled To a control unit 76 200306611 2541 (the outline is not shown in Figure 25). Therefore, the automatic control unit 2535 can move linearly as before τ without the restriction of the cable 2542. In a further point of view of this implementation and example, it should be required By operating the automatic control unit 2535, important parts of its own control and power can be located in the control unit 2541 instead of the automatic control unit 2535. The advantage of this arrangement is that the automatic control unit το 2535 can be Made smaller and therefore requires less moving space. Fig. 26 is a schematic sectional view of a part of the automatic control unit 2535 according to the embodiment of the present invention. In one aspect of this embodiment, the first terminal controller 2550a is supported on an internal shaft 2545a and the second terminal controller 2550b is supported on an external shaft 2545b that is placed away from the internal shaft 254. . The outer shaft 2545b is driven by an outer shaft belt 254 (outward extension of the plane of the figure%), and the outer shaft belt is then driven by an outer shaft wheel (positioned away from the plane of FIG. 26). The inner shaft 2545 & is coupled to an inner shaft belt 2544a, which is then powered by an inner shaft wheel because the delta terminal controller 2550a leaves the first terminal controller 2550b vertically, each terminal controller 255 〇 Can move without interference from other players. By providing separate power to each end controller 2550, each end controller 2550 can move in motion with the other. —Duo Kao Figure 20B '25 & 26 One of the embodiments of the automatic control unit described above is characterized by the single, centrifugal extension 2536 when the arm is turned' less like a multi-protrusion arrangement with the surroundings Interfering parts. On the contrary, it has the advantages of multiple extensions {they effectively increase the access degree of the automatic control unit. Therefore, the special arm arrangement can be selected based on a specific arrangement of the processing station 1920 and the loading / unloading station 1910, for example. In a specific embodiment, an automatic control unit 2535 having a single extension 2536 can be adapted to a tool having a single column of processing stations, such as described above with reference to FIGS. 1-8. As can be seen from the above description, specific embodiments of the present invention have been described here for illustrative purposes, but without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention, various modifications can be made. The present invention cannot be limited by it. The scope of the present invention is defined by the scope of patent application. [Brief Description of the Drawings] FIG. 1 is a sectional isometric view of a part of a device for processing microelectronic workpieces which can be manually and automatically processed according to one embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional side view of a portion of a device substantially similar to the device of Fig. 1 with a holder placed to receive a microelectronic workpiece manually according to one embodiment of the present invention.

圖3係根據|發明之一實施例之一具有一被定位成 從—自動化傳送裝置接收微電子工件的支架之大致類似 圖1及2的裝置之部份示意剖面側視圖。 圖4係根據本發明之一實施例之一自動化傳送 一部份之等角圖。 、 置之線 圖5係大致地沿著被揭示在圖4自動化傳送襄 5的部份示意剖面側視圖。 圖 及離開 6係根據本發明之一實施例之一 一處理站的支架之大致類似於圖 具有可移動地朝向 1的裝置之部份示 78 200306611 意剖面側視圖。 圖7係根據本發明 . S月之一實施例之一被一導引結構所 撐的支架之一部份的邱彳八_ 1 , 刀旧4知不意剖面側視圖。 圖8係根據本於明+ %月之一實施例之被揭示圖7中之從—Fig. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional side view of a portion of the device of Figs. 1 and 2 having a support positioned to receive a microelectronic workpiece from an automated transfer device according to one embodiment of the invention. Fig. 4 is an isometric view of a portion of an automated transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention. , Zhizhi Line FIG. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional side view roughly along a part of the automated conveyance system 5 disclosed in FIG. 4. Figure 6 and Figure 6 are a schematic view of a stand of a processing station according to one of the embodiments of the present invention. A section with a device that is movable toward 1 is shown. Fig. 7 is a side view of an unintentional cross-section of Qiu Yaoba_1, Daojiu 4 in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention. Figure 8 is disclosed according to one embodiment of the present invention +% month from Figure 7-

導引結構所支撐的立靼沾 A 叉木的一部份之部份示意後視圖。 圖9係根據本蘇日日 ^月之一實施例之一度量站的示意解說 圖。 圖10 A E係根據本發明之一實施例之具有傳導材質置 放其上的微電子工件之部份示意解說圖。 圖11係根據本發明之_實施例之—電化學處理站之部 份示意解說圖。 圖12係根據本發明之另一實施例之一電化學處理站之 部份示意解說圖。 圖3根據本發明之另一實施例之一具有多個電極的電 化學處理站之部份示意解說圖。 圖14係根據本發明之另-實施例之具有多個電極及流 動路徑的一雷 卜藥考 电化予處理站之部份示意解說圖。 一圖丨5係根據本發明之一實施例之一電化學處理站的部 份示意解說圖。 ⑼圖16A-B係根據本發明之一實施例之一被架構成可自 U電子工件移除材質之站的部份示意解說圖。 圖1 7係根據本發明之一實施例之一用於喷灑微電子工 牛之的份示意等角剖面圖。 圖1 8係根據本發明之另一實施例之一用於熱處理微電 79 200306611 子工件的部份示意剖視圖。 。圖19係根據本發明之-實施例之一包括-用於處理微 ; 件⑨傳送裝置之用於處理該工件之處理裝置的等角 67 4處理裝置之_部份係、被揭示在一剖面解說圖中。 圖20A及20B係根據本發明之一實施例之用於處理微 電子工件的傳送裝置之等角圖。 圖21A係根據本發明之一實施例之用於處理微電子工 件的處理政置之俯視圖,其揭示一用於操作一傳送裝置之 架構。 圖 21B 係圖 21 A 4 & 圓1A之该傳送裝置之部份等角圖,其表示 另一用於操作該傳送裝置之架構。 圖21C係圖21A及21R + 士啦 叹之该傳送裝置之一俯視圖,其 表示另一用於操作該傳送裝置之架構。 圖22係根據本發明之— ^ ^ 實施例之一用於處理微電子工 件的傳送裝置之等角圖,1 士 — 八中k疋的零件係被以剖面表示A part of the part of the riser-stained A fork supported by the guide structure shows the rear view. FIG. 9 is a schematic explanatory diagram of a measuring station according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 10A is a schematic illustration of a part of a microelectronic workpiece having a conductive material placed thereon according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 11 is a schematic explanatory view of a part of an electrochemical treatment station according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 12 is a partial schematic illustration of an electrochemical processing station according to another embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 3 is a schematic explanatory view of a part of an electrochemical processing station having a plurality of electrodes according to another embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 14 is a schematic illustration of a part of an electrochemical pretreatment station with multiple electrodes and flow paths according to another embodiment of the present invention. A figure 5 is a schematic explanatory diagram of a part of an electrochemical processing station according to an embodiment of the present invention. A Figures 16A-B are schematic illustrations of parts of a frame that constitutes a station that can remove material from a U electronic workpiece according to one embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 17 is a schematic isometric cross-sectional view of a spraying microelectronic worker according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 18 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a portion of a sub-workpiece for heat treatment of microelectronics according to another embodiment of the present invention. . FIG. 19 is an isometric view of a processing device according to one of the embodiments of the present invention, including a processing device for processing the workpiece; a part of the processing device for processing the workpiece; a part of the processing device, which is disclosed in a section Illustrated illustration. 20A and 20B are isometric views of a transfer device for processing a microelectronic workpiece according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21A is a top view of a processing device for processing a microelectronic workpiece according to an embodiment of the present invention, which discloses a framework for operating a transfer device. Fig. 21B is an isometric view of a part of the transmitting device of Fig. 21 A 4 & Circle 1A, which shows another structure for operating the transmitting device. Fig. 21C is a plan view of one of the conveying devices of Figs. 21A and 21R + Shi Latan, which shows another structure for operating the conveying device. FIG. 22 is an isometric view of a conveying device for processing microelectronic workpieces according to one of the embodiments of the present invention. The components of 1 疋 — 八 in k 中 are shown in cross section.

’並且其他零件係示意地表示。 圖23係圖22之傳送裝置之剖視圖。 圖24係圖22之傳送|置之—終端控制器的剖視圖。 圖25係根據本發明之另-實施例之-具有一單一延伸 手臂的輸送單元之等角圖。 圖26係表示於圖25中之該輸送單元的—實施例 面圖。 【元件符號說明】 100,1 800 裝置,15〇 1100處理站, 底盤,151 80 200306611 站軸,114微電子工件,102外殼,1〇3a前表面,1〇3b後 表面,l〇3c側表面,1〇6處理器,107使用者介面,1〇5電 單元’ 110輸入/輸出站,111平台,113,152容器,13〇 自動傳送裝置,112,104開口,132,160,920支架, 131自動機器,133,181引導路徑,115支架表面,116 可移除段,134護罩,12〇清潔室環境,121灰室環境, 122坌,124也、封,176,162容納表面,161頭,164載具 ,166頭旋轉軸,1〇8棒,18〇支架座,165升降器,135 直立部份,136,1358橫向部份,137底座,139手臂, 140終控制器’ 140a上部終端控制器,i4〇b下部終端 控制器,146離心凸部,141共同單元,144a内部軸, 144b外部軸,145a内部軸帶,145b外部軸帶,143a内部 軸皮帶輪’ 184接取面板,182引導軌道,183線性執道, 174引導元件,170a上部置放器球,170b下部置放器球, 169上部支撐支架,175下部支撐支架,i75a左下部支撐 支架,175b右下部支撐支架,168a上部支撐樑,168b下 部支撐樑’ 171定位表面,173閂,172鎖機構,163電端 ,167空氣端,177容納支架,178螺絲釘,18〇支撐座, 900度量站,93偵測器,940分析器,950控制器,960鏈 ’ 1012壕溝’ 1010障礙層,1〇13空洞,1〇15覆蓋層, 1066通孔’ 1161馬達’ 1162轉子,1170接觸組件,"Μ 背襯平板,1164密封,1152,1252,1352容器組件, 1153,1253,1 353 外部容器,1154,1254,i 354 内部容 器,1220 排氣圈,1256 内部側壁,1222,1242,'11243, 81 200306611 1342 出口 ’ 1232 ’ 1332 輸送導管,1259,1359 堰,1230 電極,1231電極護罩,1235擴散器,1234套管,U33電 纜,1340排水通道,1331加速通道,1 332流體流區, 1334喷嘴組件’ 1343氣體通道,1345主要流體流室, 1452多電極容器組件,1453外部容器,1454内部容器, 1440螺旋排水管道,1444流體出口,1432a主要流體入口 ’ 1432b輔助流體入口,1475主要流導引,1478主要流通 道,1479喷嘴或孔口,1432輔助流體入口,147〇分配器 ,1430電極,1472分割物,1471分隔室,1476場整型單 元’ 1470分配器通道或分配器,i48〇a_i480d虛電極位置 ’ 1474孔口 ’ 1477介面元件,1550處理站,1580a供應閥 組件’ 1554處理部份,1552容器組件,1583流體加熱器 ’ 1559堰’ 1540溢流通道,1538溢流導管,1580b廢物 閥組件’供應閥1581,1582排水閥,1537排氣導管, 1560支架,1650材質移除站,1663驅動軸,1662轉子, 1670上部室元件,168〇下部室元件,ι67ι上部室壁, 1672上部室,1681下部室壁,1621下部表面,ι682下部 室’ 1684注入喷嘴,1622外部邊緣,1675出口管,1623 周邊區’ 1620上部表面,1750喷灑站,1752容器,1760 支架,1763支架指,1762轉子,177]L主要喷灑嘴,177〇 喷灑嘴欄,1803熱處理室,1802支架,1810底座,1820 唇部,1870工件支架,1840加熱源,ι86〇第一加熱槽, 1850第二加熱槽,1841真空孔口,1 803室,1821唇部致 動裔’上部室1803a,1830蓋子,1808室容積,1822清洗 82 200306611 流體通路,腦力口熱槽,1861帛一加熱槽致動器,1854 令通道,19〇 1微電子工件,j 内部區,^ 櫃, - 905外邛區,191〇裝入/卸下站,Hu容器支架,19丨3 Λ 保護遮蔽物,1914工件容器,19〇6孔口,192〇處理站, 1930傳送裝置,1932線性執道,1934,自動機器單元, 2〇1〇輸送單元,2030手臂組件,2〇5〇a第一終端控制器, 205 0b第二終端控制器,2〇12遮蔽物或罩,開口, 2030手臂組件,2〇16座板,2〇32腰元件,2〇35中段, ❿ 2034手臂,2036a第一延伸,2036b第二延伸,2038a第一 末梢端,203 8b第二末梢端,192〇a清洗/蝕刻室,192〇c 電鑛室’ 1920b無電電鍍室,192〇d RTA室,2050a第一終 端控制器,2050b第二終端控制器,1934自動機器單元, 1901a第一工件,1901b第二工件,2036b第二延伸,2010 輸送單元,2212升降致動器,2214升降元件,2216升降 平台,2210升降組件,2212升降致動器,2218驅動軸, 2219驅動輪,2220被動輪,2214a導引執,2219驅動輪, 馨 2222皮帶,2224螺帽,2216升降平台,2230底座,2232 腰馬達,2237軸襯,2236輸出軸,2238邊緣,2240軸承 ,2242a第一控制器驅動,2243空腔,2242b第二控制器 驅動,2246a皮帶,2245a被動輪,2254電纜軌道,2054b 間隔物,2246b皮帶,2300旋轉流體穿管,2304通路, 2536單一延伸,2534手臂,2510輸送單元,2535自動控 制單元,2532腰元件,2537底座,2050a第一終端控制器 ,205 0b第二終端控制器,2542可彎曲電纜,2541控制單 83 200306611 元,2550a第一終端控制器,2550b第二終端控制器, 2545a内部軸,2545b外部軸,2546b外部軸皮帶,2536 單一離心延伸And other parts are shown schematically. FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the transfer device of FIG. 22. FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view of the transmission controller of FIG. 22-the terminal controller. Fig. 25 is an isometric view of a conveying unit having a single extended arm according to another-embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 26 is a plan view of an embodiment of the conveying unit shown in Fig. 25; [Description of component symbols] 100, 1 800 device, 15010 processing station, chassis, 151 80 200306611 station shaft, 114 microelectronic workpiece, 102 housing, 103a front surface, 103b rear surface, 103c side surface , 106 processor, 107 user interface, 105 electric unit '110 input / output station, 111 platform, 113, 152 container, 130 automatic transfer device, 112, 104 opening, 132, 160, 920 bracket, 131 automatic machine, 133, 181 guide path, 115 bracket surface, 116 removable section, 134 shield, 120 clean room environment, 121 gray room environment, 122 坌, 124 also, seal, 176, 162 receiving surface, 161 Head, 164 carrier, 166 head rotation axis, 108 rod, 180 bracket stand, 165 lifter, 135 upright part, 136, 1358 horizontal part, 137 base, 139 arm, 140 final controller '140a upper part Terminal controller, i4〇b lower terminal controller, 146 centrifugal projection, 141 common unit, 144a internal shaft, 144b external shaft, 145a internal shaft belt, 145b external shaft belt, 143a internal shaft pulley '184 access panel, 182 Guide track, 183 linear guides, 174 guide elements, upper 170a Placer ball, 170b lower placer ball, 169 upper support bracket, 175 lower support bracket, i75a left lower support bracket, 175b right lower support bracket, 168a upper support beam, 168b lower support beam '171 positioning surface, 173 latch, 172 lock mechanism, 163 electrical end, 167 air end, 177 receiving bracket, 178 screws, 180 support base, 900 measuring station, 93 detector, 940 analyzer, 950 controller, 960 chain '1012 trench' 1010 barrier layer , 1013 holes, 1015 overlay, 1066 through-hole '1161 motor', 1162 rotor, 1170 contact assembly, " M backing plate, 1164 seal, 1152, 1252, 1352 container assembly, 1153, 1253, 1 353 Outer container, 1154, 1254, i 354 inner container, 1220 exhaust ring, 1256 inner side wall, 1222, 1242, '11243, 81 200306611 1342 exit' 1232 '1332 delivery conduit, 1259, 1359 weir, 1230 electrode, 1231 electrode protection Hood, 1235 diffuser, 1234 sleeve, U33 cable, 1340 drainage channel, 1331 acceleration channel, 1 332 fluid flow zone, 1334 nozzle assembly '1343 gas channel, 1345 main fluid flow chamber, 1452 multi-electrode capacity Device assembly, 1453 external container, 1454 internal container, 1440 spiral drain pipe, 1444 fluid outlet, 1432a main fluid inlet '1432b auxiliary fluid inlet, 1475 main flow guide, 1478 main flow channel, 1479 nozzle or orifice, 1432 auxiliary fluid Entrance, 1470 distributor, 1430 electrodes, 1472 splits, 1471 compartments, 1476 field integer unit '1470 distributor channel or distributor, i48〇a_i480d virtual electrode position' 1474 orifice ', 1477 interface element, 1550 processing station , 1580a supply valve assembly '1554 treatment part, 1552 container assembly, 1853 fluid heater' 1559 weir '1540 overflow channel, 1538 overflow conduit, 1580b waste valve assembly' supply valve 1581, 1582 drain valve, 1537 exhaust duct , 1560 bracket, 1650 material removal station, 1663 drive shaft, 1662 rotor, 1670 upper chamber element, 1680 lower chamber element, ι67ι upper chamber wall, 1672 upper chamber, 1681 lower chamber wall, 1621 lower surface, ι682 lower chamber ' 1684 injection nozzle, 1622 outer edge, 1675 outlet tube, 1623 peripheral area '1620 upper surface, 1750 spray station, 1752 container, 1760 holder, 17 63 bracket finger, 1762 rotor, 177] L main spray nozzle, 1770 spray nozzle bar, 1803 heat treatment room, 1802 bracket, 1810 base, 1820 lip, 1870 workpiece holder, 1840 heating source, ι86〇 first heating tank , 1850 second heating tank, 1841 vacuum orifice, room 1 803, 1821 lip-actuated 'upper chamber 1803a, 1830 cover, 1808 chamber volume, 1822 cleaning 82 200306611 fluid pathway, brain power mouth heating tank, 1861 heating Slot actuator, 1854 order channel, 1901 microelectronic workpiece, j internal area, ^ cabinet, -905 outer area, 1910 loading / unloading station, Hu container holder, 19 丨 3 Λ protective shelter, 1914 workpiece container, 1906 orifice, 1920 processing station, 1930 conveying device, 1932 linear guide, 1934, automatic machine unit, 2010 conveying unit, 2030 arm assembly, 2050a first terminal control Device, 205 0b second terminal controller, 2012 cover or cover, opening, 2030 arm assembly, 2016 seat board, 2032 waist element, 2035 mid section, 2034 arm, 2036a first extension, 2036b second extension, 2038a first distal end, 203 8b second distal end, 1920a cleaning / Etching room, 1920c electric mining room '1920b electroless plating room, 1920d RTA room, 2050a first terminal controller, 2050b second terminal controller, 1934 automatic machine unit, 1901a first workpiece, 1901b second workpiece, 2036b Second Extension, 2010 Conveying Unit, 2212 Lifting Actuator, 2214 Lifting Element, 2216 Lifting Platform, 2210 Lifting Assembly, 2212 Lifting Actuator, 2218 Drive Shaft, 2219 Drive Wheel, 2220 Passive Wheel, 2214a Guidance, 2219 driving wheel, Xin 2222 belt, 2224 nut, 2216 lifting platform, 2230 base, 2232 waist motor, 2237 bushing, 2236 output shaft, 2238 edge, 2240 bearing, 2242a first controller drive, 2243 cavity, 2242b first Two controller drives, 2246a belt, 2245a passive wheel, 2254 cable track, 2054b spacer, 2246b belt, 2300 rotating fluid pipe, 2304 channel, 2536 single extension, 2534 arm, 2510 conveying unit, 2535 automatic control unit, 2532 waist Components, 2537 base, 2050a first terminal controller, 205 0b second terminal controller, 2542 flexible cable, 2541 control unit 83 200306611 yuan, 2550a first terminal controller A second terminal controller 2550b, 2545a inner shaft, outer shaft 2545b, 2546b outer shaft belt 2536 extending centrifugation single

8484

Claims (1)

200306611 拾、申請專利範園: -種用於處理微電子工件之裝置,其包括: 複數個處理站, 、 i 一使用者彳手動地接取該裝置之全 。处一 ’以手動地裝入該微電子工件以用於處理; 輸入/輸出站,其被架構成可支撐至少一微電子工 件以用於自㈣送進入及離開該處理站; 傳廷裝置,其被定位在鄰近該輸入/輪出站以及該 =”且該傳送裝置係自動地可移動,以在該輸"輸 出站與§亥處理站間傳送該微電子工件。 $罝2·Τ請專利範圍帛1項所述之裝置,進—步包括一 去罩妓八被定位在至少鄰近該傳送裝n至少限制使用 者之接取該傳送聚置 ^ 3.如申請專利範圍帛i項所述之裝置,進一步包括一 護罩’其被定位在至少鄰近該傳送裝置以至少限制使用者 ^取4傳送裝置’其巾該料之—部份係延伸過該傳送 ’以及其中當該支架攜帶該微電子工件時,該支架具 有一被架構成容納該微電子卫件之容納部份,1當該^ 係在該第—傳送位置時,該容納部份係被定位在:延伸: 該傳送裝置之護罩的部份底下,又當該支架係在該第二傳 迟位置時,该容納部份係被定位在該延伸過該 護罩的部份處或其上方。 置之 …4·如申請專利範圍帛1項所述之裝置,其中該處理站 係被安排成沿著-大致直線的第—線,且其中該傳送裝置 包括一被架構成可沿著大致平行於該第一線之第二線之自 85 200306611 動機益,以及其中該傳送裝置更進而包括一被置放成圍繞 該至少一處理站之外殼,且該外殼具有一第一接取孔口, 及该使用者能穿過該第一接取孔口而手動地接取全部的處 理室,又該外殼具有可被該自動機器接取之一第二接取孔 口,且忒自動機器能穿過該第二接取孔口而移動該微電子 工件’及該第二線係被定位在介於該第一線與該第一及第 二接取孔口之間。 5·如申請專利範圍第丨項所述之裝置,進一步包括一 被置放成圍繞該至少一處理站之外殼,且該外殼具有至少、_ 一被定位成可允許手動接取該裝置之全部處理站之一開口 〇 6·如申請專利範圍第丨項所述之裝置,進一步包括一 被底盤所4帶及#皮定位成可支樓冑電子工件之一容器的架 子、,同時該使用者係手動地從該容器移除該微電子工件及 傳送該微電子工件至至少一處理站。 〃 7.如申請專利範圍帛"員所述之裝置,其中該處理站 二I括;^皮#構成攜帶該微電子工件之支架,且該支架係 _ 在^於該一第一傳送位置與一和該第—傳送位置相隔開之 第-傳送位置間移動,其中該支架係被置向成在當該支架 係在該第-傳送位置時,可容納來自該傳送裝置之該微電 :件以及忒支架係被置向成在當該支架係在該第二傳 达位置時’可容納手動地來自該使用者之微電子工件,且 該支架係被架構成可選擇性地在該第—及第二傳送位置處 停止其運動。 86 200306611 8. 如申請專利範圍帛"員所述之裝置,其中該 置係包括: '、 一具有一引導路徑之傳送裝置支架; 一底座,其被該傳送裝Μ架所帶並且可 導路徑移動; ^ 51 一升降器,其被該底座所攜帶並且可沿著一升降軸 上地及向下地移動; ° 手臂,其被該升降器所攜帶,且該手臂係相對於1 底座旋轉,又該手臂具有—凸出離開該升降軸之延伸部: ,以及 第一及第二終端控制胃’其係由料臂所攜帶且被旋 轉地耦合至該手臂之該延伸部份,且每—終端控制器係相 對於該手臂單獨地旋轉及每—終端控制器係被架構成可釋 放地攜帶一微電子工件。 9. 如申請專利範圍帛i項所述之裝置,其中該裝置之 全部處理料從㈣置之_單—侧來手動地接取。 10. 如申請專利範圍第i項所述之裝置,其中該處 係包括: -處理容器’其被架構成可提供_處理流體; 支木其可移動地放置在鄰近該處理容器且被架構 了攜帶该微電子工件,及兮纟力 _ 汉4炎木可在介於一處理位置、 2該處理位置相隔開之第一傳送位置與一和該處理位置 ,第:傳送位置相隔開之第二傳送位置之間移動,其中 木係被置向可攜帶該微電子工件,在當—處理流體係在 87 200306611 孩合為内及该支架係在該處 ,,m ^ ^ 4置時,而與該處理流體相 接觸,又當該支架係在該 ^ -Γ ^ ^ + A . 傳V位置時’該支架係被置 向可谷、,内來自該傳送裝置 力兮筮一德, n亥铽電子工件,且當該支架係 在。亥苐一傳运位置時命*加 τ °亥支条係被定位成可容納手動地來 自该使用者該微電子工件, 亥支木係被架構成可選擇性地 在该弟一及弟二傳送位置處停止其運動。 η.如申請專利範圍第i項所述之褒置,其中至少一處 理站係包括:200306611 Patent application park:-A device for processing microelectronic workpieces, which includes: a plurality of processing stations, i-a user manually accesses all of the device. A processing unit is used to manually load the microelectronic workpiece for processing; an input / output station is constructed to support at least one microelectronic workpiece for self-elevating into and out of the processing station; a passer device, It is positioned adjacent to the input / wheel outbound station and the "" and the transfer device is automatically movable to transfer the microelectronic workpiece between the input " output station and the processing station. $ 罝 2 · Τ Please refer to the device described in item (1) of the patent, further comprising: removing a prostitute, positioned at least adjacent to the transmission device (n), and at least restricting the user's access to the transmission assembly. The device further includes a shield 'which is positioned at least adjacent to the transfer device to limit at least the user's access to 4 transfer devices' its towel and the material-part of which extends over the transfer' and wherein the bracket When carrying the microelectronic workpiece, the bracket has a quilt that constitutes an accommodating portion for accommodating the microelectronic guard. When the ^ is attached to the first transfer position, the accommodating portion is positioned at: extension: the Part of the shield of the teleporter Underneath, when the bracket is attached to the second delay position, the containing portion is positioned at or above the portion extending over the shield. Place it ... 4 · If the scope of patent application is 1 item The device, wherein the processing station is arranged along a first line that is substantially straight, and wherein the conveying device includes a gantry structure that can be formed along a second line that is substantially parallel to the first line. 200306611 Motive benefit, and wherein the conveying device further includes a housing placed around the at least one processing station, and the housing has a first access opening, and the user can pass through the first access The mouth has manual access to all processing chambers, and the housing has a second access opening that can be accessed by the automatic machine, and the automatic machine can move the micro through the second access opening. The electronic workpiece 'and the second line are positioned between the first line and the first and second access openings. 5. The device described in item 丨 of the scope of patent application, further comprising a Placed so as to surround the housing of the at least one processing station, and the The shell has at least one opening that is positioned to allow manual access to all the processing stations of the device. 06. The device described in item 丨 of the patent application scope further includes a 4 belt and a leather positioning by the chassis. It can be used as a shelf for one of the containers of electronic workpieces, and the user manually removes the microelectronic workpiece from the container and transfers the microelectronic workpiece to at least one processing station. 如 7. If the scope of patent application is 帛The device described by the staff member, wherein the processing station is enclosed; ^ 皮 # constitutes a bracket carrying the microelectronic workpiece, and the bracket is at the first transfer position and the first and the first transfer position. The spaced-apart transfer position is moved, wherein the bracket system is oriented so that when the bracket is positioned in the -transmission position, the microelectronics from the transfer device and the stent frame are oriented. When the bracket is in the second transfer position, the microelectronic workpiece manually received from the user can be accommodated, and the bracket system can be selectively stopped at the first and second transfer positions. Its movement. 86 200306611 8. The device as described in the scope of the patent application, wherein the set includes: ', a conveying device support with a guide path; a base, which is carried by the conveying frame and can be guided. Path movement; ^ 51 an elevator, which is carried by the base and can be moved up and down along a lifting axis; ° an arm, which is carried by the elevator, and the arm is rotated relative to 1 base, The arm has an extension protruding from the lifting shaft: and the first and second terminal control stomachs, which are carried by the feed arm and are rotatably coupled to the extension of the arm, and each— The terminal controller is independently rotated relative to the arm and each terminal controller is constructed to releasably carry a microelectronic workpiece. 9. The device as described in item (i) of the scope of patent application, wherein all the processing materials of the device are manually received from the set_single-side. 10. The device as described in item i of the patent application scope, wherein the location comprises:-a processing container 'whose quilt structure can provide processing fluid; a branch which is movably placed adjacent to the processing container and is structured Carry the microelectronic work piece, and Xi Li_ han 4 Yanmu can be in a first transfer position separated from a processing position, 2 the processing position and one and the processing position, the second: the second Move between the transfer positions, where the wood system is placed to carry the microelectronic workpiece, and when the processing flow system is within 87 200306611 and the bracket is placed there, and m ^ ^ 4 is set, and The processing fluid is in contact with each other, and when the stent is attached to the ^ -Γ ^ ^ + A. The V-position is' the stent is placed toward Kegu, from the inside of the transmission device. An electronic workpiece, and when the bracket is attached. When the transport position of the Hai-Yi-Yi was ordered, plus the τ ° Hai branch system was positioned to accommodate the microelectronic workpiece manually from the user. Stop its movement at the transfer position. η. The arrangement as described in item i of the patent application scope, wherein at least one processing station includes: —第谷态’其被架構成可提供-處理流體,且該第 一容器具有一堰以界定該處理流體之一液位; -第二容器,其被置放成圍繞該第一容器以容納該流 超過該堰之處理流體; 一工件支架,其被定位可攜帶該微電子工件,以於第 一容器中與該處理流體相接觸; 一第一電極支架,其被^位在該第—容器内且被架構 可攜帶一第一電極;-The first valley state, whose quilt structure can provide-treatment fluid, and the first container has a weir to define a liquid level of the treatment fluid;-a second container, which is placed to surround the first container to accommodate The flow exceeds the processing fluid of the weir; a workpiece holder which is positioned to carry the microelectronic workpiece so as to be in contact with the processing fluid in a first container; a first electrode holder which is positioned at the first- A container and a structure capable of carrying a first electrode; 一第二電極支架,其被該工件支架所攜帶且被定位可 攜帶-第二電木玉,且纟當該工件1架攜帶該微電子工件時 ,該第二電極與該微電子工件相接觸。 1 2 ·如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,其中至少一處 理站係包括: 至少一容器,其被架構成可提供一處理流體; 一或更多電極支架’其被定位在該第一容器内且被架 構成可各別地或一起地攜帶複數個第一電極;以及 88 200306611 一工件支架,其被定位成至少鄰近該至少一容器,以 攜帶該微電子工件與在該容器内之該處理流體相接觸,且 4工件支架係被架構成可攜帶至少一第二電極,且在當該 工件支木攜帶該微電子工件時,該第二電極與該微電子工 件相接觸。 13.如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,其中至少一處 理站係包括: 一反應容器,其包括·· 一具有一外部壁之外部容器; 第入口 ’其被架構成可引入一主體流進入該外部 容器内; 至少一第二入口,其被架構成可將與該主體流相分開 之一輔助流引入該外部容器内; 一在該外部容器内之介質場整型單元,其係被耦合至 該第二入口以容納該辅助流,該場整型單元係被架構成可 容納與該主要流相分開之穿過該外部容器的至少一部份之 辅助流,並且該場整型單元具有至少—電極分隔室,且該 辅助流能穿通過該電極分隔室’同時該輔助流係與該主要 流相分%,該電極分隔室係被被架構成可容納至少一電極 14.如申請專利範圍第1項所述之繁 1置,其中至少一處 理站係包括: 』-第:容器,其被架構成可提供—無電處理流體,且 该第一容為具有一堪以界定該處理流體一 夂—液位; 89 200306611 一各器’其被置放成繞該第一容器以容納該流超 過該堰之無電處理流體; ^ 支架’其被定位可攜帶該微電子工件,以於第一容 器中與該處理流體相接觸; 保留槽’其被架構成可攜帶該處理流體,且該保留 槽係與該第一容器流體連通的。A second electrode holder, which is carried by the workpiece holder and is positioned to be portable-the second bakelite, and when the microelectronic workpiece is carried by the workpiece 1 frame, the second electrode is in contact with the microelectronic workpiece . 1 2 · The device according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein at least one processing station comprises: at least one container, which is constructed to provide a processing fluid; one or more electrode holders, which are positioned at the first A container and a rack structure capable of carrying a plurality of first electrodes individually or together; and 88 200306611 a workpiece holder positioned at least adjacent to the at least one container to carry the microelectronic workpiece and within the container The processing fluid is in contact with each other, and the 4 workpiece holder is constructed to be able to carry at least a second electrode, and when the workpiece support carries the microelectronic workpiece, the second electrode is in contact with the microelectronic workpiece. 13. The device according to item 1 of the scope of the patent application, wherein at least one processing station comprises: a reaction container comprising: an external container having an external wall; and a first entrance whose frame structure can be introduced into a main body Flow into the external container; at least a second inlet, which is constructed to introduce an auxiliary flow separate from the main flow into the external container; a media field shaping unit in the external container, which is Coupled to the second inlet to accommodate the auxiliary stream, the field shaping unit is framed to accommodate an auxiliary stream passing through at least a portion of the external container separate from the main stream, and the field shaping The unit has at least an electrode compartment, and the auxiliary flow can pass through the electrode compartment. At the same time, the auxiliary flow system is separated from the main flow by%. The electrode compartment system is constructed to accommodate at least one electrode 14. The number of items described in item 1 of the patent application scope includes at least one processing station including: "-": a container whose frame structure can provide-no electrical processing fluid, and the first capacity is Defining the processing fluid-the liquid level; 89 200306611-each device 'is placed around the first container to accommodate the non-electrical processing fluid whose flow exceeds the weir; ^ the bracket' is positioned to carry the microelectronic workpiece So as to be in contact with the processing fluid in the first container; the retention tank is configured to carry the processing fluid in a frame, and the retention tank is in fluid communication with the first container. 汝申明專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,其中至少一處 理站係包括一度量站,其包括: 支架’其被架構成可釋放地攜帶該微電子工件; 一量測裝置, 成可偵測該微電子 且被架構 其被定位成至少鄰近該支架 工件之一傳導材質之一特性 一輪出裝置,其 送一對應於該微電子 出訊號。 可被操作地搞合至該量測裝置,以傳 工件之該傳導材質之被偵測特性的輸 其中至少一處The device described in item No. 1 of Ru Shenming's patent scope, wherein at least one processing station includes a measuring station, which includes: a bracket, whose frame is configured to releasably carry the microelectronic workpiece; a measuring device, which can detect The microelectronics is structured such that it is positioned at least one characteristic of a conductive material adjacent to the workpiece of the support, a round-out device, which sends a signal corresponding to the microelectronics output. Can be operatively coupled to the measuring device to transmit at least one of the detected characteristics of the conductive material of the workpiece 且該支架被架 I6·如申請專利範圍第丨項所述之裝置, 理站係包括一喷灑灑站,其包括: 一容器,其被架構成可攜帶一流體; 支架,其被定位成至少鄰近該容器, 構成可攜帶該微電子工件;以及 至 定’谷器内,且該流體櫚可 體“ 該流體攔具有複數個被導朝向該支, 直、g,以該流體噴灑該微電子工件。 理站:.:申請專利範圍帛1項所述之裝置,其中至少 '、匕括一材質移除站,該材質移除站係包括一具 90 200306611 第-部=及-面朝向該第一部份之第二部份之轉子,且該 第 第卩知界疋出一被架構成可移動地容納該微電子 工件之室容積,其中該第-部份包括-具有-被引導進入 該室容積之一第_?| 孔口及面對该弟二部份之第一流體通道 A第孔係可耦合至一第一流體源,且其中該第二部 伤U括”有被引導進入該室容積一第二孔口及面對該 第-部份之第二流體通道,Μ第二孔口係可麵合至該一第 二流體源。 18·如申請專利範圍帛1項所述之裝置,其中至少一處 理站係包括一具有一被架構成可提高該微電子工件之一溫 度之熱處理站,該熱處理站具有一加熱器。 1 9·如申請專利範圍第丨項所述之裝置,其中至少一處 理站係包括一熱處理站,該熱處理站係包括 一底座; 一支架,其係被該底座所攜帶且被架構成可移動接觸 該微電子工件; 一鄰近該底座之唇部,該底座之至少一個及該唇部係 可在介於一關閉位置與一打開位置間彼此相對移動,且該 唇部及θ亥底座當在關閉位置時界定出一熱處理空間; 一加熱器,其係被定位在介於該底座與該唇部之間; 一第一加熱槽’其係被定位在鄰近該加熱器,且可相 對於該加熱器而在一以該第一加熱槽與該加熱器相熱接觸 之一第一位置與一以第一加熱槽遠離該加熱器之一第二位 置間移動; 91 200306611 ▲斤一第二加熱槽,其係被定位在鄰近該第一加熱槽,且 忒第一加熱槽係當該第一加熱槽係在該第二位置時,與該 弟一加熱槽熱接觸。 2〇·如申請專利範圍第丨項所述之裝置,進一步包括一 外殼:其具有含有一第一接取孔口之一第一表面以及一朝 向”亥第表面的對面並含有一第二接取孔口之第二表面, 且忒第及第二接取孔口係獨自被尺寸化及被定位成可允 泎手動接取至該傳送裝置以及接取到用於裝入該微電子工 件之全部處理站以及/或接取到該外殼之—内部區。 、21·如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,進一步包括一 被置放成圍繞該處理站之至少之一的外殼,該外殼具有一 朝向第一方向之第一表面及一朝向該第一表面的對面之 第二表面,該第一表面具有至少一第一接取孔口,該第二 表面具有至少一第二接取孔口,且其中該外殼具有一第三 及一第四表面,其係在於該第_及第二表面間延伸且彼此 反向相對’且其中該第三及第四表面不具有尺寸化以允許 手動接取到該傳送裝置或該處理站之孔口。 22·如申請專利範圍第丨項所述之裝置,其中至少一該 施加站係包括: 至少一被架構成可攜帶一處理流體之容器; —或更多電極支架,其被定位在該容器内且被架構成 可各別地或一起攜帶複數個第一電極,且該第一電極係被 環狀地相互隔開; 工件支架’其被定位在至少鄰近該至少一容器,以 92 200306611 攜帶該微電子工件而與在該容器内之該處理流體相接觸, 該工件支架係被架構成在當該工件支架攜帶該微電子工件 時,可攜帶至少一第二電極與該微電子工件相接觸,及其 中該裝置進一步包括·· 一噴灑容器,其被被架構成可提供一噴灑流體; 一喷灑支架,其係被定位在鄰近該噴灑容器且被被架 構成可攜帶該微電子工件;And the bracket frame I6. As the device described in the scope of the patent application, the management station system includes a spraying station, which includes: a container, which is constituted to carry a fluid; the bracket, which is positioned to at least Adjacent to the container, the microelectronic workpiece can be carried; and inside the valley device, and the fluid palm can be "the fluid block has a plurality of directed to the branch, straight, g, spraying the microelectronic with the fluid Workpiece station:.: The device described in the scope of patent application 帛 1, at least ', including a material removal station, the material removal station includes a 90 200306611 part-and = face toward the The rotor of the second part of the first part, and the third knowing circle has a truss forming a chamber volume movably accommodating the microelectronic workpiece, wherein the -part includes -has-is guided into One of the first volume of the chamber volume and the first fluid channel A facing the second part of the volume can be coupled to a first fluid source, and the second part of the wound is guided. Enter a second opening in the volume of the chamber and face the- Two fluid passage, Μ second aperture lines may be bonded to the surface of a second fluid source. 18. The device according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein at least one processing station includes a heat treatment station having a frame structure capable of increasing one temperature of the microelectronic workpiece, the heat treatment station having a heater. 19. The device according to item 丨 in the scope of patent application, wherein at least one processing station includes a heat treatment station, which includes a base; a bracket, which is carried by the base and is movable by the frame. Contact the microelectronic workpiece; a lip adjacent to the base, at least one of the base and the lip are movable relative to each other between a closed position and an open position, and the lip and the θ Hai base are in A heat treatment space is defined in the closed position; a heater, which is positioned between the base and the lip; a first heating tank, which is positioned adjacent to the heater, and can be relative to the heater The heater moves between a first position where the first heating tank is in thermal contact with the heater and a second position where the first heating tank is away from the heater; 91 200306611 ▲ second heating The tank is positioned adjacent to the first heating tank, and the first heating tank is in thermal contact with the first heating tank when the first heating tank is in the second position. 20. The device according to item 丨 of the scope of patent application, further comprising a housing having a first surface including a first access opening and an opposite surface facing the "Heidi surface and containing a second connection The second surface of the access opening, and the first and second access openings are individually sized and positioned to allow manual access to the transfer device and access to the microelectronic workpiece. All processing stations and / or access to the inner area of the casing. 21. The device described in item 1 of the scope of the patent application, further comprising a casing placed around at least one of the processing stations, the The housing has a first surface facing the first direction and a second surface facing the first surface, the first surface having at least one first access opening, and the second surface having at least one second access Orifice, and wherein the shell has a third and a fourth surface, which are located between the first and second surfaces and opposite to each other ', and wherein the third and fourth surfaces are not sized to allow Manual access to the conveyor or The orifice of the processing station. 22. The device according to item 丨 of the scope of patent application, wherein at least one of the application stations comprises: at least one quilt forming a container capable of carrying a processing fluid; or more electrode holders, The plurality of first electrodes are positioned in the container and can be carried separately or together, and the first electrodes are annularly separated from each other; the workpiece holder is positioned at least adjacent to the at least one container 92 200306611 carries the microelectronic workpiece in contact with the processing fluid in the container, and the workpiece holder is constituted by a frame. When the workpiece holder carries the microelectronic workpiece, it can carry at least a second electrode and the The microelectronic workpiece is in contact with each other, and the device further includes a spraying container which is provided with a quilt structure to provide a spraying fluid; a spraying bracket which is positioned adjacent to the spraying container and is configured to be portable by the quilt structure The microelectronic workpiece; 一噴灑流體攔,其被定位在該噴灑容器内,且該喷灑 流體棚係可輕合至噴流體之—源,該噴灑流體攔具有複 數個被引導朝向該支架之流體喷嘴’以噴灑在該喷灑流體 内之微電子工件。 23.如申請專利範圍帛1項所述之裝置,其中至少一. 施加站係—被架構成可強化以及/或修復該微電子工件. 一f子層之第一施加站’且其中至少-該處理站係包括· :二移除站’進一步其中至少另一處理站係包括一被架dA spraying fluid barrier is positioned in the spraying container, and the spraying fluid shed can be closed to the source of the spraying fluid. The spraying fluid barrier has a plurality of fluid nozzles directed toward the bracket to spray on The microelectronic workpiece in the spray fluid. 23. The device as described in the scope of the application for patent, at least one of which is at least one. Application station system—the gantry structure can strengthen and / or repair the microelectronic workpiece. A first application station of a sub-layer 'and at least- The processing station system includes: two removal stations' further wherein at least another processing station system includes a frame ,可一傳導材質之覆蓋層至該微電子工件之第二… 站’更進一步且中5 s — 、k 4仙a工 —處理站係包括一被架構成可i 火戎破電子工件之導材質之熱處理站。 24.如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裳置,其中至少一影 ==構成可電泳沈積-電泳阻劑材質至該微電, 一力埶。。、:、中至少一處理站係包括-熱處理站,其具有 子工件並且提高該電泳阻劍;阻劑材質之微電 -處理站係包括—具有之—溫度,且其中至少另 木構成攜帶一喷灑流體之喷灑 93 200306611 容器的喷灑站、一被定位在鄰近該喷灑容器且被架構成可 攜帶該微電子工件之噴灑支架、以及一喷灑流體攔,其被 定位在該噴灑容器内,且該喷灑流體攔係可耦合至喷灑流 體之一源’该噴灑流體攔具有複數個被引導向該支架之流 體噴嘴’以利用該喷灑流體喷灑該微電子工件。 25·—種用於處理一微電子工件之裝置,其包括: 一處理站;Can be a covering layer of conductive material to the second of the microelectronic workpiece ... The station's further and medium 5 s —, k 4 cents a work — the processing station system includes a frame to form a guide that can break the electronic workpiece. Material heat treatment station. 24. The clothes set according to item 1 of the scope of the patent application, wherein at least one shadow == constitutes an electrophoretic deposition-electrophoresis resist material to the micro-electricity, and it is a force. . At least one of the processing stations includes a heat treatment station which has a sub-workpiece and raises the electrophoresis resistance sword; a micro-electricity-treatment station system of a resist material includes-has-temperature, and at least one of the other wooden structures carries a Spraying of spraying fluid 93 200306611 A spraying station of a container, a spraying bracket positioned adjacent to the spraying container and framed to carry the microelectronic workpiece, and a spraying fluid stop positioned at the spraying Inside the container, and the spray fluid barrier can be coupled to one of the sources of spray fluid 'the spray fluid barrier has a plurality of fluid nozzles directed to the holder' to spray the microelectronic workpiece with the spray fluid. 25 · —A device for processing a microelectronic workpiece, comprising: a processing station; 一支架’其被以可移動方式定位在鄰近該處理站且祐 架構成可攜帶該微電子工件,且該支架係在介於該一第一 傳送位置與-和該第_傳送位置相隔開之第二傳送位置間 移動’其中該支架係被置向成在當該支架係在該第一傳送 位置時’可容納來自自動傳送裝置之該微電子工件,以及 1 亥支架係被置向成在當該支架係在該第二傳送位置時,可 谷納來自該使用者之 于勁的彳政電子工件,且該支架係被架 成可選擇性地在該第一及第二傳送位置處停止其運動。A bracket 'is movably positioned adjacent to the processing station and the bracket is configured to carry the microelectronic workpiece, and the bracket is spaced between the first transfer position and the-and the _ transfer position. The second transfer position is moved 'where the bracket is oriented so that when the bracket is in the first transfer position' the microelectronic workpiece from the automatic transfer device can be accommodated, and the 1st bracket is oriented into When the support is attached to the second transfer position, Gurner's active electronic components from the user can be contained, and the support is selectively stopped at the first and second transfer positions. Its movement. 包括26自如申:專利範圍帛25項所述之裝置,其中該支架 匕括一自該處理站向上延伸 可蒋叙Μ, 之伸之载具、一被該載具所支撐且 J移動地朝向及遠離該虛 所捭;S 占之升降器,及一被該升降器 子工杜^ 破木構成可釋放地容納該微電 于工件之容納部份,且唁 仪电 旋轉。 4頭可相對於該載具及該處理站而 25項所述之裝置,其中當該支 ”亥支架不能接取到該自動傳送 27·如申請專利範圍第 架係在該第二傳送位置時 裝置。 94 200306611 2 8 ·如申請專利範圍第2 5項所述之裝置,進一步包括 一被定位於鄰近該處理站及該支架之護軍,且該支架係當 δ亥支架在該第一傳送位置時’被定位在該護罩之至少一部 份的底下,及當該支架在該第二傳送位置時,該支架係被 定在該護罩之至少一部份的上方。 29·如申請專利範圍第25項所述之裝置,進一步包括Includes 26 self-claiming: the device described in the scope of patent 25 items, wherein the bracket includes a carrier that can be extended upwards from the processing station, and a support supported by the carrier and J moving toward and Stay away from the virtual space; the lifter occupied by S and a broken wood by the lifter's work ^ constitute a receivable part that contains the microelectronics in the workpiece, and the funeral electric rotates. 4 heads can be relative to the carrier and the processing station as described in item 25, wherein when the "Hai bracket cannot receive the automatic transmission 27", such as when the first frame of the patent application is attached to the second transmission position 94 200306611 2 8 · The device as described in item 25 of the scope of patent application, further comprising a guard positioned adjacent to the processing station and the support, and the support is used when the δH support is transmitted on the first transmission. Positioned 'is positioned under at least a portion of the shield, and when the bracket is in the second transfer position, the bracket is positioned above at least a portion of the shield. 29. If applying The device described in the patent scope item 25 further includes 一自動傳送裝置,其中該自動傳送裝置包括一被架構 成在可該支架係在該第一傳送位置時,可傳送微電子工件 進入及離開該支架;以及 護罩’其被定位在鄰近該自動傳送裝置 者至少限制接取到該自動傳送裝置’同時該使用者係手 地移動該微電子工件至該支架及離開該支架。An automatic transfer device, wherein the automatic transfer device includes a frame configured to transfer microelectronic workpieces into and out of the bracket when the bracket is tied to the first transfer position; and a shield 'which is positioned adjacent to the automatic At least the transfer device restricts access to the automatic transfer device, and at the same time, the user moves the microelectronic workpiece to the support and leaves the support by hand. 30. 如申請專利範圍第25項所述之裝置,其中該支 係可在該第-及第二傳送位置之間朝向及遠離該處理站 移動,且當在第-傳送位置時,該支架係遠離該處理站 -第-距離,又當在第二傳送位置時,該支架係遠離該 理站為HE離’該第二距離係較大於該第一距離。 31. 如申請專利範圍第25項所述之裝置,盆中 及第二傳送位置間朝向及遠離該處理:而; t,且當在第—傳送位置時,該支架係遠離該處理站為-第一距離,又當在第—值 ^ m 時,該支架係遠離該❸ 占為-第一距離’該第二距離係較大於該第一距離。 32. -種用於處理—微電子工件之裝置,其包括: 95 200306611 一處理站,其被架構成可移動地容納該微電子工件; 一支架,其被定在至少鄰近該處理站,且該支架被架 構成可釋放地攜帶該微電子工件,該支架係相對於該處理 站在介於一該支架被置向成可釋放地容納該微電子工件之 第一傳送位置與一該支架被置向成可攜帶該微電子工件在 該處理站内之處理位置間移動,其中該支架係相對於該處 理站從一該處理站上方之位置來支撐。30. The device as described in claim 25, wherein the branch is movable toward and away from the processing station between the first and second transfer positions, and when in the first transfer position, the support system Far from the processing station-the first distance, and when at the second transfer position, the bracket is far from the processing station, and the HE distance is greater than the first distance. 31. According to the device described in the scope of the patent application, the processing between the basin and the second transfer position is toward and away from the processing: and; t, and when in the first transfer position, the bracket is far from the processing station as- The first distance, and when at the first value ^ m, the bracket is far from the sacrifice-the first distance is' the second distance is greater than the first distance. 32. An apparatus for processing a microelectronic workpiece, comprising: 95 200306611 a processing station configured to move the microelectronic workpiece movably; a stand positioned at least adjacent to the processing station, and The bracket is configured to releasably carry the microelectronic workpiece, and the bracket is relative to the processing station between a first transfer position where the bracket is oriented to releasably receive the microelectronic workpiece and a bracket is Orientation can move the microelectronic workpiece between processing positions in the processing station, wherein the bracket is supported relative to the processing station from a position above the processing station. 33·如申請專利範圍第32項所述之裝置,其中該處理 站係包括一被架構成可提供一處理流體之容器,且其中該 支架被置向成當該支架係在該處理位置時,可以該處理流 體而與該微電子工件相接觸。 34.如申請專利範圍第32項所述之裝置,其中該支架 包括-自該處理容器向上延伸之載具、一被該載具所支撐 :可移:地朝向及遠離該處理站之升降器,及一被該升降 續攜π之頭,且該頭具有_被架構成可釋放地容納該微 電子工件之容納部份。33. The device according to item 32 of the scope of application for a patent, wherein the processing station includes a container configured to provide a processing fluid, and wherein the bracket is oriented such that when the bracket is in the processing position, The processing fluid may be in contact with the microelectronic workpiece. 34. The device according to item 32 of the scope of patent application, wherein the bracket comprises-a carrier extending upward from the processing container, a support supported by the carrier: movable: ground facing and away from the processing station , And a head carried by the lifting and carrying π, and the head has a quilt constitute a receiving part for releasably accommodating the microelectronic workpiece. 5·士申明專利範圍第32項所述之裝置,其中該戈 :括-自該處理站向上延伸之載具、一被該載具所支指 可移動地朝向及i袁雜#老 所攜帶之頭,”頭::升降器、及-被該升降 μ貝-有-被架構成可釋放地容納該微 而才人、Γ内部份’且該頭可相對於該載具及該處理容 "於㈣运位置與該處理位置間可旋轉。 36.如申請專利範圍第32 位置係一第一傳送位置 ?其中㈣ /、Τ 4哀置進一步包括一傳送 96 200306611 置’其被架構成當該支架係在該第一傳送位置時,可自動 傳送該微電子工件至該支架,且其中該支架係可移動至_ 弟-傳送位置,且當該支架係在該第二傳送位置時,該a 架係被置向成可容納自使用者手動而來的一微電子工件, 且其中該支架係被架構成選擇性地在該第_及第二傳送位 置停止其運動。 、37.如中請專利範圍帛32項所述之裝置,進—步包括 被疋位在δ亥處理站上方之軌道,其中該支架係至少部份 地從該軌道懸吊且係沿著該軌道朝向及遠離該處理站。 · 38·如申請專利範圍帛32項所述之裝置,進一步包括 -軌道’其被被定位在該處理站上方,其中該支架係 至少部份地從該軌道懸吊且係沿著該軌道朝向及遠離該處 理站;以及 一可釋放鎖機構,其可與該支架相接合,以至少限制 5亥支架沿著該執道之運動。 39.—種用於處理一微電子工件之裝置,其包括: 一處理站,其被架構成可移動地容納該微電子工件; 一支架,其被定位在至少鄰近該處理站,且該支芊被 架構成可釋放地攜帶該微電子工件,該支架係相對於該處 理站沿著-第一引導路徑在介於該一第一傳送位置與一處 :里位置間移動,且當該支架係在該第一傳送位置時,該支 架被置向成可釋放地容納該微電子工件,及當該支架係在 ^亥處理位置時’當支架被置向成可攜帶在該處理站内之該 97 200306611 =電子工件,其中該支架係被一具有一第二引導路徑之支 =固持器所攜帶,該支架係可沿著該第二引導路徑朝向及 逖離為處理站來移動,又該第二引導路徑係被置向成橫向 該第一引導路徑。 40·如申請專利範圍第39項所述之裝置,其中該支架 ^持器包括一被定位在該處理站上方之軌道,且其中該支 架係至少部份地從該執道㈣且係沿著該軌道朝向及遠離 該處理站。 41·如申請專利範圍第39項所述之裝置,其中該支架 固持器包括一被定位在該處理站上方之軌道,且其中該支 架至少部份地從該軌道懸吊及言亥支架係、、沿著該執道朝向 及遠離該處理站,且其中該裝置更進而包括—可釋放鎖機 構,其可與該支架相接合,以當該支架係在一選定位置時 ’可至少限制該支架沿著該執道之運動。 42·如申請專利範圍第39項所述之裝置,進一步包括 可相對該處理站而沿著一傳送裝置軸移動之一傳送裝置, 且該傳送裝置係被架構成可自動地移動該微電子工件至該 該處理站及遠離該處理站,及其中該第二引導路徑係橫= 該傳送裝置軸。 、只口 43·—種用於處理微電子工件之裝置,其包括: 複數個處理站; 一傳送裝置,其被定位在鄰近該處理站且被架構成可 自動地移動該微電子工件至該處理站及離開該處理站; 一被置放成圍繞該處理站之至少之一的外殼,該外私 98 200306611 ^ 朝向第方向之第一表面及一朝向該第一表面的 對面,第_表面’’亥第一表面具有至少一第一接取孔口, 該第二表面具有至少_第二接取孔…該第—及第二接 係被尺寸化及被定位成可允許手動接取至該傳送裝 置以及全部處理站。 一料·如申請專利範圍第43所述之裝置,其中該外殼具 有一第三及一第四表面,其係在於該第一及第二表面間延 伸且朝向相互面對之方向,i其中該第三及第四表面不具 有可允許手動4妾取到該傳送裝置或該處理站之尺寸化孔口 々45·如申請專利範圍第43所述之裝置,其中該至少一 第-接取孔口包括—被架構成可與—微電子工件容器相對 準第孔口,且該至少第一接取孔口係被尺寸化以容納 至少一微電子工件及至少該傳送裝置的一部份。 46.如申請專利範圍第43所述之裝置,其中該至少一 弟接取孔口係包括一被尺寸化之一第一孔口以在一微電 子工件之手動裝入及卸下期間可允許手動接取全部處理站 47·如申請專利範圍第43所述之裝置,其中該至少一 第一接取孔口係包括一被尺寸化之一第一孔口以允許服務 接取到該傳送裝置。 48·如申凊專利範圍第43所述之裝置,其中該至少一 第一接取孔口係包括: 一第一接取孔口,其被架構成可與一微電子工件容器 99 200306611 相對準,且該第一孔口係被尺寸化以容納至少一微電子工 件及至少該傳送裝置的一部份; 另一第一接取孔口,其被尺寸化以在一微電子工件之 手動裝入及卸下期間可允許手動接取全部處理站; 另一第一接取孔口,其被尺寸化以允許服務接取到該 傳送裝置。 4 9 ·如申請專利範圍第4 3所述之裝置,其中該至少一 第二接取孔口係包括一服務孔口,其係被定位成可允許接 取到被底盤所攜帶之全部處理站。 50.—種微電子工件處理之裝置,其包括: 一具有一第一清潔度之第一區; 一具有一低於該第一清潔度之第二清潔度之第二區; 一介於該第一及第二區間之分隔室,該分隔室具有至 少一開口;以及 一用於處理微電子工件之工具,且該工具被定位成至 少鄰近該開口及包括: 複數個處理站; 一傳送裝置,其被定位在鄰近該處理站且被架構成可 自動地移動該微電子工件至該處理站及離開該處理站; 被置放成圍繞該處理站之至少之一的外殼,該外殼 具有一朝向一第一方向之第一表面及一朝向該第一表面的 對面之第二表面,該第一表面具有至少一第一接取孔口, 該第二表面具有至少一第二孔口,且該第一及第二孔口係 被尺寸化及被定位成可允許手動接取到該傳送裝置以及全 100 200306611 部處理站,jSl Φ 士方$ ,丨、 ^ 一 T〜至夕一弟一孔口係可自該第一區接取到 及°亥至)一第二孔口係可自該第二區接取到。 51.如申請專利範圍帛5〇工員所之裝置,其中該工具係 密封地被耦合至該分隔室。 一 5广一如申請專利範圍第50項所之裝置,#中該外殼具 有第一及-第四表φ,其係在於該第一及第二表面間延 伸且朝向相互面對之方肖,且其中該第三及第四表面凸出 進入該第一區。5. The device described in Item 32 of the scope of patent declaration, where the Ge: including-a vehicle extending upwards from the processing station, a movable orientation directed by the support of the vehicle and i Head, "Head :: Lifter, and-by the lifting μ shell-there-quilt constitute releasably to accommodate the micro talent, Γ internal part 'and the head can be relative to the vehicle and the processing The capacity is rotatable between the transport position and the processing position. 36. If the 32nd position in the scope of the patent application is a first transfer position? Among them, / / T 4 further includes a transfer 96 200306611 position 'its quilt When the bracket is in the first transfer position, the microelectronic workpiece can be automatically transferred to the bracket, and the bracket can be moved to the _ brother-transfer position, and when the bracket is in the second transfer position The a frame system is oriented to accommodate a microelectronic workpiece manually from the user, and wherein the frame system is configured to selectively stop its movement at the first and second transfer positions. 37. For the device described in the patent scope 帛 32, the step-by-step package The track is located above the delta processing station, wherein the bracket is at least partially suspended from the track and is oriented along the track toward and away from the processing station. 38. As described in the scope of patent application: 32 items The device further includes a track, which is positioned above the processing station, wherein the bracket is at least partially suspended from the track and is oriented along and away from the processing station; and a releasable lock mechanism It can be engaged with the bracket to limit at least the movement of the 5 Hai bracket along the road. 39. A device for processing a microelectronic workpiece, including: a processing station, the frame is movable Ground to receive the microelectronic workpiece; a bracket positioned at least adjacent to the processing station, and the support frame constitutes releasably carrying the microelectronic workpiece, the bracket is relative to the processing station along the first guide The path moves between the first transfer position and the one: in position, and when the bracket is tied to the first transfer position, the bracket is oriented to releasably receive the microelectronic workpiece, and when the bracket is Bracket system ^ Hai processing position 'When the bracket is oriented to be portable in the processing station, the 97 200306611 = electronic workpiece, wherein the bracket is carried by a support having a second guide path = holder, the bracket can be Move along the second guide path toward and away from the processing station, and the second guide path is oriented transversely to the first guide path. 40. The device according to item 39 of the scope of patent application, wherein The stent holder includes a track positioned above the processing station, and wherein the stent is at least partially from the holding rail and is oriented along the track and away from the processing station. 41. If the scope of a patent application The device according to item 39, wherein the bracket holder includes a track positioned above the processing station, and wherein the bracket is suspended at least partially from the track and the Yanhai bracket system, along the holding path Towards and away from the processing station, and wherein the device further includes a releasable lock mechanism that can be engaged with the bracket to 'at least restrain the bracket from following the lane when the bracket is tied to a selected position Movement. 42. The device according to item 39 of the scope of patent application, further comprising a conveying device capable of moving along a conveying device axis relative to the processing station, and the conveying device is constituted by a frame and can automatically move the microelectronic workpiece. To the processing station and away from the processing station, and the second guide path is horizontal = the conveyer axis. 43. A device for processing microelectronic workpieces, including: a plurality of processing stations; a conveying device, which is positioned adjacent to the processing stations and is constructed to be capable of automatically moving the microelectronic workpieces to the A processing station and leaving the processing station; a casing placed to surround at least one of the processing stations, the foreign service 98 200306611 ^ a first surface facing a first direction and an opposite surface facing the first surface, a _ surface '' The first surface has at least one first access hole, the second surface has at least a second access hole ... the first and second connections are sized and positioned to allow manual access to The transfer device and all processing stations. A material. The device according to claim 43, wherein the casing has a third and a fourth surface, which are located between the first and second surfaces and face each other, i. The third and fourth surfaces do not have a sized orifice that allows manual access to the transfer device or the processing station. 45. The device according to claim 43, wherein the at least one first-access hole The mouth includes a quilt structure which can be aligned with the microelectronic workpiece container, and the at least first access opening is sized to accommodate at least one microelectronic workpiece and at least a part of the conveying device. 46. The device according to claim 43, wherein the at least one access opening includes a first opening that is sized to allow for manual loading and unloading of a microelectronic workpiece. Manual access to all processing stations 47. The device as described in claim 43, wherein the at least one first access aperture includes a first aperture that is sized to allow service access to the transfer device . 48. The device according to claim 43 of the patent application, wherein the at least one first access opening includes: a first access opening whose frame structure can be aligned with a microelectronic workpiece container 99 200306611 And the first orifice is sized to accommodate at least one microelectronic workpiece and at least a portion of the conveying device; the other first access orifice is sized to be manually loaded on a microelectronic workpiece Manual access to all processing stations is allowed during loading and unloading; another first loading port, which is sized to allow service access to the transfer device. 4 9 · The device as described in claim 43, wherein the at least one second access opening includes a service opening which is positioned to allow access to all processing stations carried by the chassis . 50. An apparatus for processing microelectronic workpieces, comprising: a first zone having a first cleanliness; a second zone having a second cleanliness lower than the first cleanliness; A compartment in the first and second sections, the compartment having at least one opening; and a tool for processing microelectronic workpieces, the tool being positioned at least adjacent to the opening and including: a plurality of processing stations; a transfer device, It is positioned adjacent to the processing station and is framed to automatically move the microelectronic workpiece to and from the processing station; a casing placed around at least one of the processing stations, the casing having an orientation A first surface in a first direction and a second surface facing the first surface, the first surface having at least one first access opening, the second surface having at least one second opening, and the The first and second orifices are sized and positioned to allow manual access to the transfer device and all 100 200306611 processing stations, jSl Φ Shi Fang $, 丨, ^ One T ~ One Xi Yidi one hole Mouth can be from The first zone is accessed and a second orifice is accessible from the second zone. 51. The apparatus of claim 50, wherein the tool is hermetically coupled to the compartment. One of the five devices is the same as the device of the 50th in the scope of patent application. In the #, the casing has first and fourth tables φ, which lies in the squares extending between the first and second surfaces and facing each other. And the third and fourth surfaces protrude into the first region. 认如申請專利範圍第5〇項所之震置,其中該外殼具 二及—第四表面,其係在於該第-及第二表面間延 伸且朝向相互面對 α . ^ 對之方向,且其中該第三及第四表面凸出 進入該第二區。 54.如申請專利範圍第5〇項所之裝置,其中該至少一 第一孔口係包括: 座,一 f 一孔口,其被架構成可與-微電子工件容器相對It is assumed that the shock device of the 50th scope of the patent application scope, wherein the shell has second and fourth surfaces, which lies between the first and second surfaces and faces toward each other α. ^ Pairs of directions, and The third and fourth surfaces protrude into the second region. 54. The device according to item 50 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the at least one first orifice comprises: a seat, an f-orifice, and its frame structure can be opposite to the microelectronic workpiece container >且°亥第孔口係被尺寸化以容納至少一微電子工件及 至少該傳送裝置的一部份; U電子件及 另 一 $ —孑匕口 其被尺寸化以在一微電子工件之手動 政入及卸下期間可允許手動接取全部處理站; ^ 一第一孑匕口 裝置。 口,其被尺寸化以允許服務接取到該傳送 5 5 ·如申請專利範 视固第5〇所述之裝置,其中該外殼具 有一第三及一第四矣 伸且朝向相互面對二其係在於該第-及第二表面間延 之方向,且其中該第三及第四表面不具 101 200306611 有可允許手動接取到該傳送裝置或該處理站之尺寸化孔口 56.—種用於在一處理站之一環境内處理微電子工件之 傳送裝置,其包括: 一底座單元,其可沿著一引導路徑移動; 一手臂組件,其被操作地耦合至該底座單元以和底座 單元一起移動,且該手臂組件包括一沿著一升降路徑移動> And the Haidi orifice is sized to accommodate at least one microelectronic workpiece and at least a part of the conveying device; U electronic parts and another $-孑 dagger which is sized to a microelectronic workpiece During manual entry and unloading, all processing stations can be manually accessed; ^ a first dagger device. Port, which is sized to allow service access to the transmission 5 5 · The device as described in the patent application Fan Shigu No. 50, wherein the housing has a third and a fourth extension and faces each other two It is in the direction of the first and second surface extensions, and the third and fourth surfaces do not have 101 200306611. There are sized apertures that allow manual access to the conveyor or the processing station. 56. A conveying device for processing microelectronic workpieces in an environment of a processing station, comprising: a base unit that can be moved along a guide path; an arm assembly operatively coupled to the base unit to the base The units move together, and the arm assembly includes a movement along a lifting path 之單一手臂,該手臂至少具有自該升降路徑凸出之一第一 段;以及 一第一終端控制器及第二終端控制器,其被耦合至該 手臂,以可繞著至少一大致平行於該升降路徑之旋轉軸旋 轉,該第-終端控制器與該手臂分隔為一第一距離及該第 二終端控制器與該手臂分隔為一第二距離,以使得該第一 及第二終端控制器係相對於該手臂在不同高度。 57·如申請專利範圍第56項所述之裝置,其中該底座 單元包括-具有一被架構成可沿著一線性軌道移動之引導 元件之輸送單元。 5 8 ·如申明專利範圍第5 6項所述之裝置,盆中該第一 段係僅自該升降路徑凸出之段,且其中該第4第1終端 控:器繞著一單一旋轉軸旋轉,進一步其中該第一終端控 制為係疊在該第二終端控制器上方。 々9·如申明專利範圍第56項所述之裝置,其中該第一 及第二終端控制器獨立地繞著一共同軸旋轉。八 的.如申請專利範圍帛56項所述之裝置,進一步包括 102 200306611 控制及電力電路,其被架構成可控制該第一及第二終 端控制器,該控制電路係位在遠離該底座單元、該手臂及 該第一及第二終端控制器;及 一可彎曲通信鏈,其被耦合在介於該控制電路與該底 座單凡間,該通信鏈係被架構成可允許在介於該底座埠與 該控制及電力電路間之相對運動。A single arm having at least a first section protruding from the lifting path; and a first terminal controller and a second terminal controller coupled to the arm so as to be able to run around at least one substantially parallel to The rotation axis of the lifting path rotates, the first terminal controller is separated from the arm by a first distance and the second terminal controller is separated from the arm by a second distance, so that the first and second terminal control The organs are at different heights relative to the arm. 57. The device according to item 56 of the patent application, wherein the base unit comprises a transport unit having a gantry which constitutes a guide element movable along a linear track. 5 8 · According to the device described in Item 56 of the declared patent scope, the first section in the basin is only the section protruding from the lifting path, and wherein the fourth and first terminal control: the device is around a single rotation axis Rotating, further wherein the first terminal is controlled to be tethered above the second terminal controller. 々9. The device according to claim 56 of the stated patent scope, wherein the first and second terminal controllers independently rotate around a common axis. 8. The device described in the scope of application for patent 56 items, further including 102 200306611 control and power circuit, which is constructed to control the first and second terminal controllers, and the control circuit is located away from the base unit The arm and the first and second terminal controllers; and a flexible communication link coupled between the control circuit and the base, the communication link is constructed to allow the Relative motion between the base port and the control and power circuits. 61·如申请專利範圍第56項所述之裝置,其中該第一 終端控制器&第二終端控制器兩者係被麵合至一自該升巧 路仫凸出之。亥手臂的延伸,該第一及第二終端控制器繞著 一大致平行該升降路徑之共同軸而相互獨立地旋轉,該第 -終端控制器與該手臂分隔為一第一距離及該第二終端护 制益與該手臂分隔為-第二距離,以使得該第一及第二终 端控制器係相對於該手臂在不同高度。 、 62.如申請專利範圍第%項所述之裝置,61. The device according to item 56 of the scope of patent application, wherein both the first terminal controller and the second terminal controller are bonded to each other to protrude from the jackpot. The extension of the arm, the first and second terminal controllers rotate independently of each other around a common axis that is substantially parallel to the lifting path, the first terminal controller is separated from the arm by a first distance and the second The terminal guard is separated from the arm by a second distance, so that the first and second terminal controllers are at different heights relative to the arm. 62. The device described in item% of the scope of patent application, ^控制器係被定位在該第二終端控制器上/,、且rt 裝置包括·· 々見其中4 該手臂旋轉該第一終端控制器; 外部驅動軸,其被向外放置 :一動袖同轴地置向,該外部驅動二二動= 終端6控制器《相對該手臂旋轉該第二終端控^亥第 3:種用於處理微電子工件之方法,其包括: 引導-處理工具之一自動傳送裝置來移動至少—第 103 200306611 微電子工件到達、離關十 或彳達及離開該工具之一選定處里 站,該選定處理站係該工 ”之叙處理 ,、之歿數個處理站之一去· 引導一選定處理或兮 ^ 乂在該選定處理站内之一第一 微電子工件的執行;及 昂 對於该工具之每一處 里站,手動地裝入一第二微電子 工件進入該處理站及引導力 y導在该處理站内之每一該被手動地 4入之第'一 4政電子工件的_ I田 44. f的處理,其包括引導在該選定處理 站處之在該第二微電子卫件上之執行選定處理。 如申請專利範圍第63項所述之方法,其中引導在 第一微電子工件上之執行選定處理係包括引導在 一電冰處ί里中之施加金屬至該微電子工件。 ▲认如申請專利範圍第63項所述之方法,其中引導在 5亥第-及第二微電子工件上之執行選定處理係包括引導在 -電泳處理中之施加至少部份絕緣材質至該微電子工件。 66.如申請專利編63項所述之方法,其中引導在 該第-及第二微電子工件上之執行選定處理係包括引導在 一電泳處理中之施加一光阻材質至該微電子工件,且其中 該方法進一步包括: 提咼該光阻材質之一溫度;及 漂洗該微電子工件。 67. 如申請專利範圍第63項所述之方法,其中引導在 该第一及第二微電子工件上之執行選定處理係包括引導在 一電泳處理中之施加一焊煬材質至該微電子工件。 68. 如申請專利範圍第63項所述之方法’其中該選定 104 200306611 ,且 及第 處理站包括-被架構成可漂洗該微電子工件之嘴灑站 其中-較處理之執行包括在該喷灑站内漂洗該第_ 二微電子工件。 69·如申請專利範圍帛63項所述之方法,其中 及第二微電子工件之每—者包括—種子層,且其中料 該第一及第二微電子工件上之勃 、跋—士 卜 之執仃一璉定處理係包括強 、修復或強化及修復該種子層 70.如申請專利範圍帛63 g所述之方法,其中該第, 及第二微電子工件之每一者包括一種子層,且其中引^ 該第-及第二微電子工件上之執行一選定處理係包括以 一覆蓋層在該種子層上。^ The controller is positioned on the second terminal controller, and the rt device includes ... 々 See 4 of them. The arm rotates the first terminal controller; an external drive shaft, which is placed outward: a moving sleeve with Axial-ground orientation, the external drive two and two movements = terminal 6 controller "rotating the second terminal control relative to the arm ^ Hai No. 3: a method for processing microelectronic workpieces, including: one of the guide-processing tools Automatic conveying device to move at least-No. 103 200306611 The microelectronic workpiece arrives, departs from customs or reaches and leaves one of the selected stations of the tool, the selected processing station is the processing of the worker, and several of the processing One of the stations to guide a selected process or execution of a first microelectronic workpiece in the selected processing station; and manually load a second microelectronic workpiece for each station in the tool Entering the processing station and the guiding force y guide the processing of each of the first and fourth political electronic workpieces in the processing station __field 44.f, which includes guiding the processing at the selected processing station.在 此 微电子 In the second microelectronic The execution selection process on the guard piece. The method as described in item 63 of the patent application scope, wherein the execution selection process on the first microelectronic workpiece includes guiding an applied metal in an electric ice to the microelectronics. Electronic workpieces. ▲ The method described in item 63 of the scope of patent application, wherein guiding the selected processing on the 5th and second microelectronic workpieces includes guiding the application of at least a part of the insulating material in the electrophoresis process. To the microelectronic workpiece. 66. The method described in item 63 of the patent application, wherein directing the execution of the selected processing on the first and second microelectronic workpieces includes directing the application of a photoresist material in an electrophoretic process To the microelectronic workpiece, and wherein the method further comprises: raising a temperature of the photoresist material; and rinsing the microelectronic workpiece. 67. The method according to item 63 of the scope of patent application, wherein the guidance is in the first And performing the selected processing on the second microelectronic workpiece includes guiding the application of a welding grate material to the microelectronic workpiece in an electrophoresis process. The method described above, wherein the selected 104 200306611, and the first processing station includes-the frame constitutes a mouth spray station that can rinse the microelectronic workpiece, wherein-the execution of the more processing includes rinsing the second microelectronic workpiece in the spray station 69. The method as described in the scope of application patent No. 63, wherein each of the second microelectronic workpiece includes a seed layer, and it is expected that the first and second microelectronic workpieces will have a seed layer and a post. Bu Zhiyi's fixed treatment system includes strengthening, repairing or strengthening and repairing the seed layer 70. The method described in the scope of patent application 帛 63g, wherein each of the first and second microelectronic workpieces includes a The seed layer, and performing a selected process on the first and second microelectronic workpieces includes a cover layer on the seed layer. 71.如申請專利範圍帛63項所述之方法,其中該選定 處理係站包括一材質移除站,且其中引導一選定處理之執 行係包括在該材質移除站内從該第一及第二微電子工件移 除材質。 72·如申請專利範圍第63項所述之方法,其中該選定 處理係站包括一熱處理站,且其中該方法更包括提高該& · 處理站中該第一及第二微電子工件之一溫度。 73·如申味專利範圍第63項所述之方法,其中引導在 該第一及第二微電子工件上之執行選定處理係包括引導施 加一 干:%材質至該第一及第二微電子工件,且其中至少— 處理站係包括: 在施加該焊煬材質至該第一微電子工件之後,引導該 自動傳送裝置以裝入該第一微電子工件進入該噴灑站内以 105 200306611 漂洗該第一微電子工件; 在&加邊焊煬材質至該第二微電子工件之後,手動地 表入邊第二微電子工件進入該喷灑站内以漂洗該第二微電 子工件; 74·如申请專利範圍第63項所述之方法,其中引導在 °亥第及第二微電子工件上之執行選定處理係包括引導施 加強化材質至該第一及第二微電子工件,且其中至少一處 站係包括一材質移除站,另一處理站包括一多陽極材質 %加站,及尚有另一處理站包括一熱處理站,且其中該方 法進一步包括: 引導該自動傳送裝置以裝入該第一微電子工件進入該 T質移除站内,以從該第一微電子工件移除材質,進入該 多陽極材質施加站以施加一第一傳導材質至該第一微電子 工件及進入該熱處理站以退火該第一微電子工件; 予動地裝入該71. The method of claim 63, wherein the selected processing system station includes a material removal station, and wherein the execution system that guides a selected process includes removing the first and second materials from the material removal station. Microelectronic workpiece removal material. 72. The method of claim 63, wherein the selected processing system station includes a heat treatment station, and wherein the method further includes improving one of the first and second microelectronic workpieces in the & processing station temperature. 73. The method as described in item 63 of the Shenwei patent scope, wherein guiding the execution of the selected processing on the first and second microelectronic workpieces includes guiding the application of a dry:% material to the first and second microelectronic workpieces And at least the processing station includes: after applying the welding material to the first microelectronic workpiece, guiding the automatic transfer device to load the first microelectronic workpiece into the spraying station to rinse the first microelectronic workpiece at 105 200306611 Microelectronic workpiece; After adding the edge welding material to the second microelectronic workpiece, manually insert the second microelectronic workpiece into the spraying station to rinse the second microelectronic workpiece; 74. If applying for a patent The method of item 63, wherein directing the execution of the selected processing on the first and second microelectronic workpieces includes directing the application of a reinforced material to the first and second microelectronic workpieces, and at least one of the stations includes A material removal station, another processing station includes a multi anode material% plus station, and another processing station includes a heat treatment station, and the method further includes: Guide the automatic transfer device to load the first microelectronic workpiece into the T mass removal station to remove material from the first microelectronic workpiece, enter the multi-anode material application station to apply a first conductive material to the A first microelectronic workpiece and entering the heat treatment station to anneal the first microelectronic workpiece; 〜刊’夷移除站内 以從該第二微電子工件移除材質,手動地裝入該第二微 子工件進入該多陽極材質施加站,以施加—_ 乐一傅導材 至該第二微電子工件,及手動地裝入該第二微電子工件 入該熱處理站以退火該第二微電子工件。 75·如申請專利範圍第63項所述之方法,甘山~ $丄 y ’其中引導在 該第一及第二微電子工件上之執行選定處理係包括引導電 泳阻劑材質施加至該第一及第二微電子工件 τ 且其中至少 一處理站係包括一熱處理站,及另一處理站$以 ^ „ 0 B枯一嗔灑站 ,且其中該方法進一步包括·· 106 200306611 引導該自動傳送裝置以 熱處理站内,以提高在該第 材質之溫度’接著進入該噴 裝入該第一微電子工件進入該 一微電子工件上之該電泳阻劑 灑站以漂洗該第一微電子工件 手動地裝入該第二微雷+工姓 电于工件進入该熱處理站内,以 提高在該第二微電子工件上之兮蕾 什上之5玄電冰阻劑材質之溫度,接 著手動地裝入該第二微雷早工I、仓 一 电于工件進入該喷灑站以漂洗該第 二微電子工件。~ Issue 'remove the station to remove material from the second microelectronic workpiece, manually load the second neutrino workpiece into the multi-anode material application station to apply —_Le Yifu guide material to the second The microelectronic workpiece, and the second microelectronic workpiece is manually loaded into the heat treatment station to anneal the second microelectronic workpiece. 75. The method described in item 63 of the scope of patent application, Ganshan ~ $ 丄 y 'wherein guiding the execution of the selected processing on the first and second microelectronic workpieces includes guiding the application of an electrophoretic resist material to the first And the second microelectronic workpiece τ, and at least one of the processing stations includes a heat treatment station, and another processing station $ ^ „0 B with a sprinkler station, and wherein the method further includes 106 10606611 to guide the automatic transfer The device is placed in a heat treatment station to increase the temperature of the first material, and then enter the spraying and loading the first microelectronic workpiece into the electrophoretic resist spray station on the microelectronic workpiece to rinse the first microelectronic workpiece manually. Load the second micro-mine + worker's electricity into the workpiece into the heat treatment station to increase the temperature of the 5 xuan electric ice resist material on the second microelectronic workpiece, and then manually load the material The second micro-mine pre-worker I and Cangyi Electric enter the spraying station to rinse the second microelectronic workpiece. 76.如申請專利範圍第63項所述之方法,其中該手動 地裝入該第二微電子工件係包括手動地裝入該第二微電子 工件’同時該自動傳送裝置係攜帶該至少一第一微電子工 件。 77·如申請專利範圍帛63項所述之方法,其中該選定 處理站包括-材質施加,占,且其中引導一自動傳送裝置包 括當該支架係在-第—傳送位置時,弓i導該自動傳送裝置76. The method of claim 63, wherein manually loading the second microelectronic workpiece includes manually loading the second microelectronic workpiece 'while the automatic transfer device carries the at least one first A microelectronic workpiece. 77. The method according to item 63 of the patent application scope, wherein the selected processing station includes-material application, accounting, and wherein guiding an automatic transfer device includes guiding the bracket when the bracket is in the-transfer position. Automatic transfer device 以移動該至少-第-微電子卫件到達、離開或到達及離開 ”亥材貝轭加站之一支架,及其中手動地裝入一第二微電子 工件包括當戎支架係在一與該第一傳送位置相分隔之第二 傳送位置時,手動地傳送該第二微電子工件進人該材質施 加站之該支架。 ^ 78·如申請專利範圍第〇項所述之方法,其中手動地 波:4第一微電子工件係包括在一被定位成鄰近該自動傳 送统置之護罩之上方通過該第二微電子工件,且該護罩至 少限制接取至該自動傳送裝置。 107 200306611 79.如申請專利範圍第63項所述之方法, 該第一及第二微電子工件上之執行選定處理係包括引導一 第一流體朝向该微電子工件夕 墙 . 弟一表面,及引導一不同 於該第一 ^ _之第二流體朝向該微電子工件之一第二表 ,且該微電子工件之第二表面係與該第一表面對面朝-向。 80. 如申請專利範圍第63項所述之方法,其中引 該第一及第二微電子工件上之執行選定處理係包括斜敍刻 該第一及第二微電子工件之一周邊區。 81. 如申料㈣圍第63韻述之方法,其巾引導在 該第-及第:微電子卫件上之執行選定處理係包括退火一 被施加至該第一及第二微電子工件之傳導材質。 82. 種在一處理工具内處理複數個微電子工件之方法 ,其包括: 當-支架係在—第—傳送位置時,引導該工具之一自 動傳送裝,以移動一第一微電子工件到達該工具之支架; 支杀以移動该第一微電子工件到達該工具之一 處理站 件 A自動傳送裝置以從該支架取回該第一微電子工 時 田支木係在一該第一傳送位置不同之第二傳送位置 手動傳送一第二微電子工件到達該支架;及 理站 引導忒支架以移動該第二微電子工件到達該工具之處 〇 83J申凊專利範圍第82項所述之方法,其中當該支 108 200306611 架係ΐ該第二傳送位置時手動傳送該第二微電子工件進入 »亥支架係包括當該支架係在該第 送該第二微電子工件到達該支架。V 上方時,傳 84. 如申請專利範圍第82項所述之方法 送該第二微電子工件包括 、甲乎動傳 置之m 破定位成鄰近該自動傳送裝 置之4罩之上方通過該第二 、衣 制接取至該自動傳送裝置。電子工件,且該護罩至少限 85. -種用於在—具有第一 理複數個微電子工件之方法,且支::::,處 二第一傳送位置相分隔之第二傳送位置,該方 :帛支架係在一第一傳送位置時,引導該工呈 一自動傳送裝置以移動一第一 一 夕别弟彳放電子工件到達該工且之 第一支架; 引導該第一多扭^ # 叉木以移動該第一微電子工件進入該工且 之一第一處理站 八 引導該自動傳送裝置以從該第一支架取回該第一微電 々 田^第一微電子工件係被該自動傳送裝置以及/或該 第支木處J里日夺,手動傳送一第二微電子工件至該工具之 一第二支架;及 一 引導兮楚-+ Μ币一支架以移動該第二微電子工件到達該工具 之一第二處理站。 86·如申請專利範圍第85項所述之方法,其中當該第 109 200306611 二支架係在—與該第—傳送位置相分隔之第:傳送位置時 ’手動傳送-第二微電子工件至該第二支架係包括當該第 二支架係位在該第一傳送位置之上方時,傳送該第二微 子工件。 87. —種用於使用一用於處理一微電子工件之方法,勹 括: /匕 裝入該微電子工件於一支架上,該支架係被一被定位 在一處理站上方之支架固持器所支撐; 當該微電子工件係被該支架所攜帶時,降低該微電子 工件進入該處理站内; 從該處理位置提高該微電子工件及從該支架移除該微 電子工件;及 沿著该支架固持器之一引導路徑移動該支架而遠離該 處理站。 88. 如申請專利範圍第87項所述之方法,其中該處理 站係容納在一外殼内,且其中該方法進一步包括在經沿著 忒引導路径移動省支架後,從該外殼移除該支架。 89·如申請專利範圍第87項所述之方法,其中提高及 降低該微電子工件係包括沿著一第一軸而提高及降低該微 電子工件,且其中沿著該引導路徑移動該支架包括沿著一 橫向於該第一軸之第二軸來移動該支架。 90·如申請專利範圍第87項所述之方法,進一步包括 在經沿著該引導路徑移動該支架離開該處理站後,接取該 處理站。 110 200306611 91·如申請專利範圍第87項 可釋放地固持該支¥在、){α之方法,進一步包栝 。 持…在-沿者該”路徑之—選定位置處 2.種在一具有在一列内之—组 處理-微電子工件之方法,該方法包括…之處理裝置内 微電:二手背所搞帶之第-終端控制器來固持_第一 微電該手臂所搞帶之第二—一第二 相隔離微:Γ件在一第,内,且自該“ ¥距離,且定位該第2微電子工件在一第 第二Γ亥手臂相隔一第二距離,該第二距離係不同於該 =口=專利範圍第92項所述之方法,進_步包括 ㈣第-終端控制器以及/或該第二終端控制器,以定 4 1亥第一及第二微電子工件在該手臂的上方,以使得該第 U電子工件係相對該第二微電子工件被重疊。 94. 如申請專利範圍第92項所述之方法,進一步包括 相對於該手臂之一升降路徑來旋轉該手臂及相對於一大致 平仃邊升降路徑之一第一旋轉轴來旋轉該第一終端控制器 以定位該第一終端控制器鄰近該處理站之一者。 95. 如申請專利範圍第92項所述之方法,進一步包括 相對於該手臂而穿過一第一平面來旋轉該第一終端控制器 ,相對於該手臂而穿過一第二平面來旋轉該第二終端控制 111 200306611 态,且相對於该處理站來 Lh 木疋轉忒手臂以定位該第一及第二 終端控制器,其中該第一平 一 ,^ 〇 弟千面並不在該手臂上方的一區内 相父於纟亥弟^一《平面。 9 6 ·如申清專利範圍第9 2话略、+、 • 现国弟92項所述之方法,進一步包括 旋轉該第-終端控制器及/或第二終端控制器以定位該 第-及第二微電子工件在該手臂的上方,以使得該第一微 電子工件相對該第二微電子工件係被重疊;及 沿著一鄰近該處理站列之線性執道來移動該手臂,且 該手臂之運動可沿著該執道來一起移動該第一及第二工件 兩者。 97·如申請專利範圍第92項所述之方法,進一步包括 繞著一共同轴來相互早獨地說轉该第一及第二終端控制器To move the at least-first-microelectronic guard to arrive, leave, or reach and leave one of the brackets of the Haicai yoke plus station, and manually load a second microelectronic workpiece including the When the second transfer position is separated from the first transfer position, the second microelectronic workpiece is manually transferred into the support of the material application station. ^ 78. The method according to item 0 of the scope of patent application, wherein Wave: 4 The first microelectronic workpiece includes passing through the second microelectronic workpiece above a shield positioned adjacent to the automatic transfer system, and the shield at least restricts access to the automatic transfer device. 107 200306611 79. The method as described in claim 63 of the scope of patent application, the performing selected processing on the first and second microelectronic workpieces includes directing a first fluid toward the microelectronic workpiece wall, a surface, and guiding a The second fluid different from the first ^ _ is directed to one of the second tables of the microelectronic workpiece, and the second surface of the microelectronic workpiece faces the first surface opposite to the first surface. 80. 63 The method described in item 1, wherein the execution selected processing on the first and second microelectronic workpieces includes obliquely engraving one of the peripheral areas of the first and second microelectronic workpieces. 81. 63rd rhyme The method described above, wherein the execution of the selected treatment on the first and second: microelectronic guards includes annealing a conductive material applied to the first and second microelectronic workpieces. 82. A processing tool A method for internally processing a plurality of microelectronic workpieces, including: when the bracket is tied to the first transfer position, guiding one of the tools to automatically transfer equipment to move a first microelectronic workpiece to the bracket of the tool; To move the first microelectronic workpiece to one of the tools, a processing station A automatic transfer device to retrieve the first microelectronic timepiece from the bracket is manually connected to a second transfer position different from the first transfer position Transmitting a second microelectronic workpiece to the bracket; and a management station guiding the bracket to move the second microelectronic workpiece to the tool. The method described in item 82 of the patent scope of 83J, wherein when The support 108 200306611 manually transports the second microelectronic workpiece into the second transport position when the second transport position is entered. »The stent system includes when the bracket is transported to the first microelectronic workpiece to reach the bracket. When V is above, the transmission 84. Sending the second microelectronic workpiece according to the method described in item 82 of the scope of the patent application includes: positioning the m-transformer to be adjacent to the top of the 4 cover of the automatic conveying device through the second garment Take it to the automatic conveying device. Electronic workpiece, and the shield is limited to at least 85.-A method for using-having a first plurality of microelectronic workpieces, and supporting: :::, at the two first transfer position phase Separated second transfer position, the side: when the bracket is in a first transfer position, guide the worker to present an automatic transfer device to move the first night to put the electronic workpiece to the worker and the first bracket ; Guide the first multi-twist ^ # fork wood to move the first microelectronic workpiece into the worker and one of the first processing station eight guide the automatic transfer device to retrieve the first micro-electric Putian from the first bracket ^ First microelectronics The workpiece is captured by the automatic conveying device and / or the first branch of J Liri, manually transferring a second microelectronic workpiece to a second bracket of the tool; and a guide-+-M coin-bracket for moving The second microelectronic workpiece reaches a second processing station of one of the tools. 86. The method according to item 85 of the scope of application for a patent, wherein when the 109 200306611 second bracket is in the-separated from the-transfer position: the transfer position 'manually transfer-the second microelectronic workpiece to the The second bracket system includes transferring the second neutrino workpiece when the second bracket is positioned above the first transfer position. 87. A method for using a microelectronic workpiece, including: / mounting the microelectronic workpiece on a bracket, the bracket being held by a bracket holder positioned above a processing station Supported; when the microelectronic workpiece is carried by the bracket, lowering the microelectronic workpiece into the processing station; raising the microelectronic workpiece from the processing position and removing the microelectronic workpiece from the bracket; and along the One of the stent holders guides the path to move the stent away from the processing station. 88. The method as described in claim 87, wherein the processing station is housed in a housing, and wherein the method further comprises removing the bracket from the housing after moving the provincial bracket along the 忒 guide path . 89. The method of claim 87, wherein raising and lowering the microelectronic workpiece includes raising and lowering the microelectronic workpiece along a first axis, and wherein moving the support along the guide path includes The support is moved along a second axis transverse to the first axis. 90. The method according to item 87 of the scope of patent application, further comprising accessing the processing station after leaving the processing station by moving the support along the guide path. 110 200306611 91. If the 87th item of the scope of patent application is applied, the method of releasably holding the support ¥,) {α is further burdened. Hold ... at the selected location of the "follow-by-this" path. 2. A method for processing-microelectronic workpieces in a group with a row, the method including the processing device in the microelectronics: second-hand belt The first-terminal controller to hold _ the first micro-electric second-to-second phase isolation micro-band: Γ pieces in a first, and from the "¥ distance, and positioning the second micro The electronic workpiece is separated by a second distance from a second second arm, the second distance is different from the method described in item 92 of the patent range, and further includes a terminal controller and / or The second terminal controller determines that the first and second microelectronic workpieces are above the arm, so that the U-th electronic workpiece is overlapped with respect to the second microelectronic workpiece. 94. The method of claim 92, further comprising rotating the arm relative to one of the lifting paths of the arm and rotating the first terminal relative to a first rotation axis of one of the lifting paths. The controller positions one of the first terminal controllers adjacent to the processing station. 95. The method of claim 92, further comprising rotating the first terminal controller through a first plane relative to the arm, and rotating the second terminal controller through a second plane relative to the arm. The second terminal controls 111 200306611 state, and relative to the processing station, Lh Mucha turns his arms to position the first and second terminal controllers, where the first flat one, ^ 〇 brother face is not above the arm The father of the district in the area of Yu Haidi ^ a "plane. 9 6 · The method described in item 92 of the patent application scope is omitted, +, and • The method described in item 92 of the present country further includes rotating the -terminal controller and / or the second terminal controller to locate the-and A second microelectronic workpiece is above the arm so that the first microelectronic workpiece is overlapped with respect to the second microelectronic workpiece system; and the arm is moved along a linear path adjacent to the processing station row, and the The movement of the arm can move both the first and second workpieces along the lane. 97. The method according to item 92 of the scope of patent application, further comprising turning the first and second terminal controllers independently of each other around a common axis. 拾壹、圖式·· 如次頁 112Pick up, schema ... as next page 112
TW92103777A 2002-02-22 2003-02-24 Apparatus with processing stations for manually and automatically processing microelectronic workpieces TW200306611A (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US10/080,914 US6991710B2 (en) 2002-02-22 2002-02-22 Apparatus for manually and automatically processing microelectronic workpieces
US10/080,910 US6749391B2 (en) 1996-07-15 2002-02-22 Microelectronic workpiece transfer devices and methods of using such devices in the processing of microelectronic workpieces
US10/080,915 US20030159921A1 (en) 2002-02-22 2002-02-22 Apparatus with processing stations for manually and automatically processing microelectronic workpieces

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW200306611A true TW200306611A (en) 2003-11-16

Family

ID=27767800

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW92103777A TW200306611A (en) 2002-02-22 2003-02-24 Apparatus with processing stations for manually and automatically processing microelectronic workpieces

Country Status (3)

Country Link
AU (1) AU2003213148A1 (en)
TW (1) TW200306611A (en)
WO (1) WO2003072853A2 (en)

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7585398B2 (en) * 1999-04-13 2009-09-08 Semitool, Inc. Chambers, systems, and methods for electrochemically processing microfeature workpieces
DE102007037404B4 (en) * 2007-08-06 2009-06-18 Symax Systemtechnik Sondermaschinen Gmbh Method for the mechanical processing and / or transfer of components
US20230411222A1 (en) * 2022-05-24 2023-12-21 Applied Materials, Inc. Model-based parameter adjustments for deposition processes
CN115295470B (en) * 2022-10-08 2022-12-27 四川上特科技有限公司 Wafer transfer device and corrosion method

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4155815A (en) * 1978-04-03 1979-05-22 Francis William L Method of continuous electroplating and continuous electroplating machine for printed circuit board terminals
US4404078A (en) * 1982-02-18 1983-09-13 Francis William L Loose parts plating device
US4539090A (en) * 1984-04-27 1985-09-03 Francis William L Continuous electroplating device
US6318951B1 (en) * 1999-07-09 2001-11-20 Semitool, Inc. Robots for microelectronic workpiece handling

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2003072853A3 (en) 2003-10-16
WO2003072853A2 (en) 2003-09-04
AU2003213148A1 (en) 2003-09-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI313894B (en) Apparatus and method for substrate processing
US6258223B1 (en) In-situ electroless copper seed layer enhancement in an electroplating system
KR100493989B1 (en) Resist processing system and resist processing method
US6921467B2 (en) Processing tools, components of processing tools, and method of making and using same for electrochemical processing of microelectronic workpieces
US6352623B1 (en) Vertically configured chamber used for multiple processes
KR100875788B1 (en) Substrate Processing Equipment
TWI327747B (en) Substrate processing apparatus
US7699021B2 (en) Cluster tool substrate throughput optimization
KR102513108B1 (en) Atmospheric plasma apparatus for semiconductor processing
TW200910495A (en) Wet clean system design
KR100792017B1 (en) Unit for plating process
JP2003526193A (en) Semiconductor processing apparatus having wafer redirection mechanism
WO2002004887A9 (en) Methods and apparatus for processing microelectronic workpieces using metrology
US20030159921A1 (en) Apparatus with processing stations for manually and automatically processing microelectronic workpieces
TWI687532B (en) Processing system containing an isolation region separating a deposition chamber from a treatment chamber
US6893505B2 (en) Apparatus and method for regulating fluid flows, such as flows of electrochemical processing fluids
TW200306611A (en) Apparatus with processing stations for manually and automatically processing microelectronic workpieces
KR102172073B1 (en) Substrate storing apparatus, and apparatus for treating substrate using the same
TW200533424A (en) Apparatus for electroless deposition of metals onto semiconductor substrates
JP2017011015A (en) Substrate processing apparatus
US20050260771A1 (en) Processing device and processing method
JP5438127B2 (en) Multi-channel development system
JP2008277480A (en) Substrate transfer treatment method and apparatus
JP2012060083A (en) Apparatus and method of coating and developing, and recording medium
US20230298936A1 (en) Combined self-forming barrier and seed layer by atomic layer deposition